Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 489

SL 550

SL 55 AMG
SL 600
SL 65 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you Please read this manual carefully, then
on the purchase of your new return it to your vehicle where it will be
Mercedes-Benz. handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your de- designed to acquaint you with the oper-
sire to own an automobile that will be as ation of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the They are designed to help improve
efforts of many skilled engineers and the safety of the vehicle operator and
craftsmen. To help assure your driving occupants.
pleasure, and also the safety of you and
We extend our best wishes for many miles
your passengers, we ask you to make a
of safe, pleasurable driving.
small investment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company
Contents

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 37


Product information................................ 9 Exterior view......................................... 22 Unlocking ............................................. 38
Operators Manual ............................... 10 Cockpit................................................. 24 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 38
Service and warranty information .. 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 26 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 39
Important notice for California Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30 Starter switch positions.................. 40
retail buyers and lessees of Center console ..................................... 31 Adjusting .............................................. 43
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Upper part ...................................... 31 Seats .............................................. 43
Maintenance .................................. 12 Lower part ...................................... 32 Steering wheel................................ 46
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Overhead control panel ........................ 33 Mirrors............................................ 49
Change of address or ownership.... 12 Storage compartments......................... 34 Driving.................................................. 50
Operating your vehicle outside Door control panel................................ 36 Fastening the seat belts ................. 50
the USA or Canada......................... 13 Starting the engine ......................... 53
Where to find it.................................... 14 Parking brake ................................. 55
Symbols............................................... 15 Driving off ....................................... 56
Operating safety .................................. 16 Switching on headlamps................. 57
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 16 Turn signals .................................... 57
Problems with your vehicle.................. 17 Windshield wipers........................... 58
Reporting safety defects...................... 18 Problems while driving.................... 60
Reporting safety defects ................ 18 Parking and locking.............................. 62
Vehicle data recording......................... 19 Parking brake ................................. 63
Information regarding electronic Switching off headlamps................. 63
recording devices........................... 19 Turning off the engine..................... 64
Releasing seat belts........................ 64
Locking ........................................... 65
Contents

Seats ................................................. 124


Safety and Security ........................... 67 Controls in detail ............................. 103 Moving the seats forward and
Occupant safety................................... 68 Locking and unlocking ....................... 104 backward ..................................... 124
Air bags .......................................... 70 SmartKey ..................................... 104 Lumbar support ........................... 124
Occupant Classification System..... 74 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 108 Multicontour backrest*................ 125
Seat belts ....................................... 79 Checking the batteries in the Seat heating................................. 126
Roll bar........................................... 83 SmartKey or SmartKey with Seat ventilation* .......................... 128
Children in the vehicle.................... 84 KEYLESS-GO* .............................. 113 Memory function ............................... 129
Panic alarm .......................................... 88 Loss of the SmartKey or Storing positions into memory..... 130
Activating ....................................... 88 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 113 Recalling positions from memory. 130
Deactivating ................................... 88 Opening the doors from Lighting ............................................. 131
Driving safety systems......................... 89 the inside ..................................... 113 Exterior lamp switch .................... 131
ABS ................................................ 89 Opening the trunk ........................ 114 Combination switch ..................... 135
BAS ................................................ 91 Closing the trunk.......................... 116 Corner-illuminating front
ESP ............................................... 91 Valet locking ................................ 120 fog lamps* ................................... 136
Electro-hydraulic brake system ...... 94 Trunk lid emergency release ........ 121 Hazard warning flasher ................ 137
Anti-theft systems................................ 98 Power closing assist for trunk lid . 121 Interior lighting ............................ 138
Immobilizer..................................... 98 Automatic central locking ............ 122 Courtesy lighting.......................... 139
Anti-theft alarm system.................. 98 Locking and unlocking from Trunk lamp................................... 139
Tow-away alarm ........................... 100 the inside ..................................... 122
Contents

Instrument cluster ............................. 140 Automatic transmission...................... 172 Automatic climate control .................. 188
Adjusting instrument cluster Gear selector lever........................ 172 Deactivating the automatic
illumination .................................. 140 Shifting procedure ........................ 173 climate control system ................. 191
Coolant temperature gauge ......... 141 Gear selector lever positions ........ 174 Operating the automatic
Resetting trip odometer ............... 141 Driving tips.................................... 175 climate control system in
Tachometer.................................. 142 Gear ranges .................................. 176 automatic mode............................ 192
Outside temperature indicator ..... 142 Automatic shift program ............... 177 Setting the temperature ............... 193
Control system .................................. 143 Gear selector lever one-touch Adjusting air distribution .............. 194
Multifunction display.................... 143 gearshifting................................... 179 Adjusting air volume ..................... 195
Multifunction steering wheel........ 144 Steering wheel gearshift control Maximum cooling MAXCOOL........ 195
Menus .......................................... 146 one-touch gearshifting* ................ 180 Front defroster ............................. 195
Standard display menu ................ 149 Manual shift program Air recirculation mode .................. 196
AMG menu ................................... 150 (SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only) 182 Air conditioning ............................ 198
AUDIO menu ................................ 153 Emergency operation Residual heat and ventilation........ 199
NAV menu.................................... 155 (Limp-Home Mode) ....................... 184 Ventilated glove box ..................... 200
Distronic* menu........................... 156 Good visibility ..................................... 185
Vehicle status message memory Headlamp cleaning system ........... 185
menu............................................ 156 Rear view mirrors.......................... 185
Settings menu.............................. 157 Sun visors ..................................... 186
Trip computer menu..................... 167 Rear window defroster.................. 187
TEL* menu ................................... 169
Contents

Power windows.................................. 201 At the gas station .............................. 279


Opening and closing the Operation ......................................... 265 Refueling...................................... 279
windows ....................................... 201 The first 1000 miles (1500 km)......... 266 Check regularly and before
Synchronizing power windows ..... 203 Driving instructions............................ 267 a long trip..................................... 280
Retractable hardtop ........................... 204 Drive sensibly save fuel............. 267 Engine compartment ......................... 282
Opening and closing the Drinking and driving ..................... 267 Hood ............................................ 282
retractable hardtop ...................... 204 Pedals .......................................... 267 Engine oil ..................................... 283
Driving systems ................................. 214 Power assistance ......................... 268 Transmission fluid level................ 287
Cruise control............................... 214 Brakes.......................................... 268 Oil level in the ABC system .......... 287
Distronic*..................................... 218 Driving off .................................... 270 Coolant ........................................ 288
Distance warning function*.......... 229 Parking......................................... 271 Windshield washer system and
Active Body Control (ABC)............ 230 Tires ............................................. 271 headlamp cleaning system........... 289
Parktronic system* Hydroplaning................................ 272 Battery ......................................... 290
(Parking assist)............................. 233 Tire traction.................................. 273 Tires and wheels................................ 291
Useful features .................................. 238 Tire speed rating .......................... 273 Important guidelines .................... 291
Storage compartments................. 238 Winter driving instructions ........... 274 Tire care and maintenance........... 292
Cup holders.................................. 243 Standing water............................. 275 Direction of rotation..................... 294
Ashtray......................................... 244 Passenger compartment .............. 276 Loading the vehicle ...................... 294
Cigarette lighter ........................... 244 Driving abroad.............................. 276 Recommended tire inflation
Load assist in the trunk................ 245 Control and operation of pressure....................................... 300
Power outlet................................. 246 radio transmitters ........................ 276 Checking tire inflation pressure ... 302
Floormat*..................................... 247 Catalytic converter....................... 277 MOExtended system* .................. 312
Telephone*................................... 247 Emission control .......................... 277 Tire labeling ................................. 313
Tele Aid ........................................ 250 Coolant temperature.................... 278 Load identification ....................... 317
Garage door opener ..................... 257 DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................. 317
Contents

Maximum tire load ....................... 319 Flat tire............................................... 417


Maximum tire inflation pressure .. 319 Practical hints .................................. 341 Preparing the vehicle .................... 417
Uniform Tire Quality Grading What to do if ................................... 342 Mounting the spare wheel ............ 417
Standards (U.S. vehicles) ............. 320 Lamps in the instrument cluster ... 342 MOExtended system* ................... 425
Tire ply material ........................... 322 Air bag off indicator lamp.............. 357 Batteries............................................. 427
Tire and loading terminology........ 322 Vehicle status messages in the Disconnecting the batteries.......... 429
Rotating tires ............................... 325 multifunction display..................... 359 Removing the batteries................. 430
Winter driving .................................... 327 Where will I find ...? ............................ 400 Charging and reinstalling
Winter tires .................................. 327 First aid kit.................................... 400 batteries ....................................... 430
Block heater (Canada only) .......... 328 Vehicle tool kit, jack, and Reconnecting the batteries........... 431
Snow chains................................. 329 spare wheel .................................. 400 Jump starting...................................... 432
Maintenance...................................... 330 Locking/unlocking in an emergency .. 403 Towing the vehicle.............................. 434
Maintenance service indicator Unlocking the vehicle.................... 403 Installing towing eye bolt .............. 436
message....................................... 330 Locking the vehicle ....................... 405 Fuses.................................................. 437
Calling up the maintenance Lowering the load assist Fuse boxes in engine
service indicator display............... 332 manually ....................................... 406 compartment ................................ 438
Resetting the maintenance Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 407 Fuse box in passenger
service indicator........................... 332 Replacing bulbs .................................. 409 compartment ................................ 439
Vehicle care....................................... 333 Bulbs............................................. 409 Fuse in trunk................................. 439
Cleaning and care of the vehicle .. 333 Replacing bulbs for front lamps .... 411 Emergency engine shut-down....... 439
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps ..... 414
Replacing wiper blades....................... 415
Placing wiper arms in vertical
position......................................... 415
Removing wiper blades ................. 416
Installing wiper blades .................. 416
Contents

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ......... 457


Technical data.................................. 441 Capacities .................................... 457 Index................................................. 467
Parts service ...................................... 442 Engine oils.................................... 460
Warranty coverage............................. 443 Engine oil additives ...................... 460
Loss of Service and Warranty Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 460
Information Booklet...................... 443 Brake fluid.................................... 460
Identification labels............................ 444 Premium unleaded gasoline ......... 461
Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 446 Fuel requirements ........................ 461
SL 550.......................................... 446 Gasoline additives ........................ 462
SL 55 AMG ................................... 446 Coolants....................................... 463
SL 600, SL 65 AMG...................... 446 Windshield washer system and
Engine................................................ 447 headlamp cleaning system........... 465
Rims and tires.................................... 449
Same size tires............................. 450
Mixed size tires ............................ 451
Spare wheel ................................. 453
Electrical system................................ 454
Main dimensions................................ 455
Weights.............................................. 456
Introduction
Product information
Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at any
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Center where
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies you will receive comprehensive informa-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- tion, also on permissible technical modifi-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, cations, and where proper installation will
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. be performed.
their reliability, safety and special suit- Please do not use them.
ability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.

9
Introduction
Operators Manual

This Operators Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations, and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operators Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. New Car Limited Warranty
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in Emission System Warranty
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are Emission Performance Warranty
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operators Vermont only)
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Center will be glad to inform you of correct (Lemon Laws)
the operation of any equipment, any care and operating procedures.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will The Operators Manual and Maintenance
be glad to demonstrate the proper proce- Booklet are important documents and
dures. should be kept with the vehicle.

10
Introduction
Operators Manual

Important notice for California (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
retail buyers and lessees of function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
Mercedes-Benz automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have Written notification should not be sent to a
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA, dealer, it should be addressed to:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its LLC in writing of the need for its repair, Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
authorized repair or service facilities fail to
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- Customer Assistance Center
fix one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than One Mercedes Drive
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the
ly notified us in writing of the need for
period of 18 months from original delivery
its repair, or
of the vehicle or the accumulation of
18000 miles (approximately 29000 km)
on the odometer of the vehicle, whichever
occurs first, a reasonable number of repair
attempts is presumed for a retail buyer
or lessee if one or more of the following
occurs:

11
Introduction
Operators Manual

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Change of address or ownership

The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you change your address, be sure to
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory trained technical send in the Change of Address Notice
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to found in the Service and Warranty Informa-
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number: tion Booklet, or simply call the
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
you when you take the vehicle to an 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
Center (in the USA) at
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
service. The service advisor will record
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Customer Service (in Canada) at
each service in the booklet for you. Customer Assistance Representatives 1-800-387-0100. It is in your own interest
24 hours a day, 365 days a year. that we can contact you should the need
For additional information refer to the arise.
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all
Program brochure in your vehicle literature literature with the vehicle to make it avail-
portfolio. able to the next operator.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the Notice of Purchase of Used
Car found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.

12
Introduction
Operators Manual

Operating your vehicle outside the USA Certain Mercedes-Benz models are
or Canada available for delivery in Europe under our
European Delivery Program. For details,
If you plan to operate your vehicle in consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz
foreign countries, please be aware that: Center or write to:
Service facilities or replacement parts In the USA:
may not be readily available,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat- European Delivery Department
alytic converters may not be available; One Mercedes Drive
the use of leaded fuels will damage the Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
catalysts,
In Canada:
gasoline may have a considerably low-
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
er octane rating, and improper fuel can
European Delivery Department
cause engine damage.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

13
Introduction
Where to find it

This Operators Manual is designed to pro-


vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your
has its own reference color: about the equipment installed on your ve- vehicle can be found in this section.
hicle. This section expands on the Getting
started section and also describes techni-
At a glance Indexes
cal innovations. If you are already familiar
Here you will find an overview of all the with the basic functions of your vehicle, The table of contents and the index are
controls that can be operated from the this section will be of particular interest to designed to help you find information
drivers seat. you. quickly and easily.
The following publications are part of your
Getting started Operation vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you Here you will find all the information you this Operators Manual
need for your first drive. You should read need for the proper operation of your vehi- the Maintenance Booklet
this section first if this is your first cle.
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle. provided as required depending on the
Practical hints equipment options installed in your
vehicle.
This section provides fast assistance for
Safety and Security dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features in your vehicle.

14
Introduction
Symbols
Symbols
Trademarks: This symbol points to instructions for
ESP is a registered trademark of
Warning! G you to follow.
DaimlerChrysler. A number of these symbols appearing
Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
in succession indicates a multiple-step

HomeLink is a registered trademark ards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others. procedure.
of Prince, a Johnson Controls
Company. page This symbol tells you where to
look for further information on a
The following symbols are found in this ! Highlights hazards that may result in dam-
age to your vehicle. topic.
Operators Manual:
This continuation symbol marks
* Optional equipment is identified i Helpful hints or further information you may
with an asterisk. Since standard find useful. a warning which is continued on
equipment varies between models, the next page.
the descriptions and illustrations This continuation symbol marks
in this manual may differ slightly a procedure which is continued
from the actual equipment of your on the next page.
vehicle.
-> This symbol is used to indicate
cross-references to term defini-
tions.
Display Words appearing in the multi-
function display are printed in
the type shown here.

15
Introduction
Operating safety

Proper use of the vehicle


Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicles electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a the Technical data section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could seri- bance, or you suspect that damage to your traffic rules and regulations
ously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic which is a safe distance from the road.
components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the
vehicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
or other qualified maintenance or repair to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the facility for further inspection or repairs. risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
never turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself.
Removal of any of these labels may cause
you and others to be unaware of certain
risks which may result in an accident and/or
personal injury.

16
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the matter is
not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center management, or if necessary contact us
at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

17
Introduction
Reporting safety defects

For the USA only:


The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966.

Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

18
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic
recording devices

(Including notice pursuant to California Code 9951)


Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.

19
20
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel

21
At a glance
Exterior view

22
At a glance
Exterior view

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 Trunk 6 Exterior rear view mirrors a Headlamp cleaning 185,
Opening the trunk 114 Adjusting 49 system 289

Closing the trunk 116 Auto-dimming rear view 185 b Front lamps 410

Spare wheel 400 mirrors c Windshield wipers 58

Vehicle tool kit 400 7 Towing 434 Wiper blades, replacing 415

2 Rear lamps 410 Installing towing eye bolt 436 Wiper blades, cleaning 337

3 Rear window defroster 187 8 Tires and wheels 291 d Windshield

4 Fuel filler flap 279 Checking tire inflation 302 Wiping with windshield 60
pressure washer fluid
Refueling 279
General information 291 Cleaning 337
Gasoline 461
Flat tire 417 e Retractable hardtop
5 Doors
Vehicle tool kit 400 Opening/closing 204
Locking and unlocking 104
9 Hood Wind screen 209
Opening and closing 113
Opening 282 Luggage cover 210
Locking/unlocking in an 403
emergency Engine oil 283 Sunshade for panorama 213
Coolant 288, roof*
463

23
At a glance
Cockpit

24
At a glance
Cockpit

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 Exterior lamp switch 57, 131 9 Front Parktronic* warning 235 j Combination switch
2 Headlamp cleaning button 185 indicator
High beam 57
3 Cruise control lever a Digital clock
Turn signals 57
b Interior storage compart- 240
Cruise control 214 Windshield wipers 58
ments (locking/unlocking)
Distronic* 218 k Parking brake pedal 55, 63
c Overhead control panel 33
4 Shift paddle*: downshift 180 l Parking brake release 55
d Glove box 238
5 Instrument cluster 26, 140 handle
e Center console 31, 32
6 Multifunction steering 30, 144 m Hood lock release 282
f Starter switch 40
wheel n Door control panel 36
g Horn
7 Shift paddle*: upshift 180 o Power window switch 201
h Steering wheel adjustment 46
8 Lever for Voice Control
stalk
System*, see separate
operating instructions

25
At a glance
Instrument cluster

26
At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page Item Page


1 Coolant temperature E Distronic* indicator 218, 4 Reset button for:
gauge with: lamp1 (white) or 350 Resetting trip odometer 141
D Coolant temperature 348 distance warning
lamp* (red) Resetting individual 158
warning lamp settings
2 Speedometer with: 3 Left multifunction display
Adjusting instrument 140
with:
L Left turn signal 57 cluster illumination
indicator lamp Outside temperature 142
display
K Right turn signal 57
Main odometer 143
indicator lamp
Stored speed for
; Brake warning lamp, 345
USA only Cruise control 214
3 Brake warning lamp, 345 Distronic* 156,
Canada only 218
v ABS/ESP warning 342
lamp
1 Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning/indicator
lamp without function. It illuminates when the
ignition is on. It should go out when the engine
is running.

27
At a glance
Instrument cluster

28
At a glance
Instrument cluster

Item Page Item Page


5 Tachometer with: 142 < Seat belt telltale 352
A High beam head- 135 X Combination low tire 355
lamp indicator lamp pressure/TPMS mal-
Engine malfunction 346 function telltale,
indicator lamp, USA only
USA only Low tire pressure
Engine malfunction telltale*,
indicator lamp, Canada only
Canada only 6 Right multifunction
C Roll bar warning 351 display with:
lamp Trip odometer 143
- Antilock Brake Sys- 344 Gear selector lever 174
tem (ABS) indicator position
lamp Gear range indicator 177
1 Supplemental 354 Program mode indicator 178
Restraint System
(SRS) indicator lamp 7 Fuel gauge with:
A Fuel reserve warning 350
lamp

29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel

Item Page Item Page


1 Left multifunction display in 143 5 Menu systems:
the speedometer Press button
2 Right multifunction display 143 for next menu
in the tachometer for previous menu
Operating the control sys- 144 6 Moving within a menu:
tem Press button
3 Selecting the submenu or j for next display
setting the volume:
Press button k for previous display

up/to increase
down/to decrease
4 Telephone*: 169,
Press button 247
s to take a call
to dial
to redial
t to end a call
to reject an incoming
call

30
At a glance
Center console
Center console
Upper part Item Page
1 Central locking switch 122
Alarm system indicator 99
lamp
2 Hazard warning flasher 137
on/off switch
3 Central unlocking switch 123
4 Passenger front air bag off 78
indicator lamp
5 Center and side air vent 194
adjustment
6 COMAND system, see sepa-
rate operating instructions
7 Right cup holder 243
8 KEYLESS-GO* start/stop 41
button
9 Automatic climate control 190
panel
a Ashtray 244
Cigarette lighter 244
b Left cup holder 243

31
At a glance
Center console

Lower part Item Page Item Page


1 Gear selector lever for 172 7 ABC vehicle level control 230
automatic transmission button
2 Parktronic system* 233 8 ESP switch 93
deactivation switch 9 Thumbwheel for setting 226
3 Exterior rear view mirror 49 following distance for
adjustment Distronic*
4 ABC suspension tuning 232 a Distance warning function* 229
button on/off switch
5 Tow-away alarm switch 100 b Program mode selector 182
6 Retractable hardtop switch 204 switch for automatic
transmission
Roll bar buttons 83

32
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel
Item Page
1 Left reading lamp on/off 138
2 Temperature sensor for 188
automatic climate control
3 Right reading lamp on/off 138
4 Interior lighting control 138
5 Interior rear view mirror 49, 185
6 Reading lamp 138
7 Garage door opener 257
8 Tele Aid (emergency call 250
system) button
9 Microphone for Tele Aid 250,
and telephone* 247

33
At a glance
Storage compartments

34
At a glance
Storage compartments

Item Page Item Page


1 Glove box 238 7 Navigation computer
2 Passenger seat storage 239 (refer to separate
compartment Operators Manual)

First aid kit 400 8 Rear storage compart- 240


ment, drivers side
3 Door storage compart- 238
ment CD changer 240

4 Rear storage compart- 240 9 Door storage compart- 238


ment, passenger side ment

5 Side storage compartment 242 a Drivers seat storage com- 239


in trunk, parcel net partment

6 Trunk b Parcel net in passenger 241


footwell
Vehicle tool kit, jack, spare 400
wheel c Armrest storage compart- 239
ment
Load assist 245
Telephone* compartment 239
Luggage cover 210
d Luggage straps 242
Trunk load 456
Load limit 296

35
At a glance
Door control panel

Item Page
1 Inside door handle 113
2 Switches for 201
opening/closing door and
rear side windows
3 Storing seat, mirror and 129
steering wheel settings
(Memory function)
4 Seat heating switch 126
Seat ventilation* switch 128
5 Seat adjustment switch 43
6 Remote trunk opening 116
switch
Remote trunk 116
opening/closing* switch

36
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking

37
Getting started
Unlocking

The Getting started section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey


overview of the vehicles most basic func- Warning! G
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
mation given here. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
If you are already familiar with the basic children unattended in the vehicle, or with
functions described here, the Controls in access to an unlocked vehicle. A childs
detail section will provide you with further unsupervised access to a vehicle could
information. The corresponding page result in an accident and/or serious person-
references are located at the end of each al injury.
segment.
SmartKey with remote control
Press unlock button on the
1 Lock button SmartKey.
2 Unlock button for trunk lid
All turn signal lamps flash once.
3 Unlock button
4 Panic button ( page 88) An acoustic warning sounds once.
The locking knobs in the doors
move up.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
The electro-hydraulic brake system
is activated.

38
Getting started
Unlocking

Enter the vehicle and insert the Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with
SmartKey in the starter switch. KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away
Opening a door causes its window to open from the door.
lock and unlock the vehicle without using
slightly. It will fully close when the door is
the remote control buttons on the Grasp an outside door handle.
shut.
SmartKey and start the engine without in-
All turn signal lamps flash once.
! A side window will not work if it is blocked serting the SmartKey in the starter switch.
with ice or if the battery needs charging. If you An acoustic warning sounds once.
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
cannot shut a door, do not force it or you could
damage the door or the side window. KEYLESS-GO function. The locking knobs in the doors
Fix whatever is affecting the window before move up.
trying to shut the door.
Warning! G The anti-theft alarm system is
For more information, see SmartKey disarmed.
( page 104). When leaving the vehicle, always take the
The electro-hydraulic brake system
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
is activated.
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to i If the vehicle has been parked for more than
an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle
access to a vehicle could result in an in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function.
accident and/or serious personal injury.

39
Getting started
Unlocking

Enter the vehicle. Starter switch positions 0 For removing SmartKey


1 Power supply for some electrical
Opening a door causes its window to open
consumers, such as seat adjustment
slightly. It will fully close when the door is
shut.
Warning! G 2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical
consumers) and driving position
! A side window will not work if it is blocked When leaving the vehicle, always remove the All lamps (except high beam headlamp
with ice or if the battery needs charging. If you SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
cannot shut a door, do not force it or you could from the starter switch, take it with you, and lamps unless activated) in the instru-
damage the door or the side window. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
Fix whatever is affecting the window before tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
trying to shut the door. instrument cluster fails to come on
unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised ac- when the ignition is switched on, have
For more information, see SmartKey with cess to a vehicle could result in an accident it checked and replaced if necessary.
KEYLESS-GO* ( page 108). and/or serious personal injury. If a lamp in the instrument cluster
remains on after starting the engine or
SmartKey comes on while driving, refer to Lamps
in the instrument cluster
( page 342).
3 Starting position
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
tor and warning lamps (except high beam head-
lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
come on. The indicator and warning lamps
(except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
out when the engine is running. This indicates
Starter switch that the respective systems are operational.

40
Getting started
Unlocking

i The SmartKey can only be removed from the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Position 0
starter switch with the gear selector lever in
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is inside Before you press the KEYLESS-GO
position P.
the vehicle, pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, the vehicles on-board
! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the start/stop button on the gear selector electronics have the status 0 (as with
starter switch, the starter battery may not be lever corresponds to turning the SmartKey SmartKey removed).
sufficiently charged. to the various starter switch positions.
Check the starter battery and charge it if Position 1
necessary ( page 427).
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Get a jump start ( page 432). button once.
To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
completely discharged battery, always remove This supplies power for some electrical
the SmartKey from the starter switch when the consumers, such as seat adjustment.
engine is not in operation.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
For more information, see SmartKey start/stop button
( page 104). once again, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
For information on starting the engine KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
using the SmartKey, see Starting with the twice, the power supply is again switched off
SmartKey ( page 53). 1 USA only
2 Canada only
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
located in the vehicle.
Make sure the gear selector lever is set
to P.
Do not depress the brake pedal.

41
Getting started
Unlocking

Ignition (or Position 2) i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
tor and warning lamps (except high beam head-
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
ton twice. lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster
This supplies power for all electrical come on. The indicator and warning lamps
consumers. (except high beam headlamp indicator lamp and
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) should go
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
out when the engine is running. This indicates
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator that the respective systems are operational.
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the For more information, see SmartKey with
instrument cluster fails to come on KEYLESS-GO* ( page 108).
when the ignition is switched on, have For information on starting the engine
it checked and replaced if necessary. using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
If a lamp in the instrument cluster see Starting with KEYLESS-GO*
remains on after starting the engine ( page 54).
or comes on while driving, refer to
Lamps in the instrument cluster
( page 342).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once, the power supply is
again switched off.

42
Getting started
Adjusting
Adjusting
Seats
Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt ( page 50).
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Warning! G Observe the following points:
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- Adjust the seat backrest until your arms
tening of seat belts, must be done before Do not adjust the drivers seat while driving. are slightly angled when holding the
the vehicle is put into motion. Adjusting the seat while driving could cause steering wheel.
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Adjust the seat to a comfortable seating
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat position that still allows you to reach the
backrest in an excessively reclined position accelerator/brake pedal safely.
as this can be dangerous. You could slide The position should be as far back as
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide possible with the driver still able to oper-
ate the controls properly.
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause Adjust head restraint so that it is as
serious or fatal injuries. The seat backrest close to the head as possible and the
and seat belts provide the best restraint center of the head restraint supports
the back of the head at eye level.
when the wearer is in a position that is as
upright as possible and seat belts are prop- Never place hands under the seat or
erly positioned on the body. near any moving parts while a seat is
being adjusted.
Failure to do so could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

43
Getting started
Adjusting

Seat adjustment
Warning! G Warning! G The seat adjustment switch is located in
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Children 12 years old and under must be the door.
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* seated and properly secured in an appropri-
from the starter switch, take it with you, and ately sized infant restraint, toddler restraint,
lock the vehicle. or booster seat recommended for the size
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey and weight of the child For additional infor-
with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the start- mation, see Children in the vehicle
er switch or the SmartKey with ( page 84).
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
the power seats can be operated when the significantly increased if the child restraints
respective door is open. Therefore, do not are not properly secured in the vehicle and
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or the child is not properly secured in the child
1 Head restraint height
with access to an unlocked vehicle. A childs restraint.
2 Seat height
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
3 Seat cushion tilt
result in an accident and/or serious person-
4 Seat cushion depth
al injury.
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment
6 Seat backrest tilt

44
Getting started
Adjusting

Switch on the ignition ( page 40). Seat cushion tilt Head restraint height
or Press the switch up or down in Press the switch up or down in
direction of arrow 3 until your upper direction of arrow 1.
Open the respective door.
legs are lightly supported.
i The memory function ( page 129) lets you Warning! G
store the settings for the drivers seat position Seat cushion depth
together with the settings for the steering wheel
and the exterior rear view mirrors. Press the switch forward or backward For your protection, drive only with properly
in direction of arrow 4 until your legs positioned head restraints.
Seat fore and aft adjustment are supported comfortably. Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
Press the switch forward or backward the head as possible and the center of the
Seat backrest tilt head restraint supports the back of the head
in direction of arrow 5.
Press the switch forward or backward at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
! When moving the seats, make sure there in direction of arrow 6. injury to the head and neck in the event of
are no items in the footwell or behind the seats; an accident or similar situation.
otherwise you could damage the seats.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Seat height head restraints. Head restraints are intend-
ed to help reduce injuries during an acci-
Press the switch up or down in dent.
direction of arrow 2.

i When moving the seat fore or aft after


adjusting the head restraints, the head restraints
may readjust automatically.

45
Getting started
Adjusting

Head restraint tilt Steering wheel i The memory function ( page 129) lets you
store the settings for the steering wheel together
with the settings for the drivers seat position
Warning! G and the exterior rear view mirrors.
Make sure that
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv- you can reach the steering wheel with
ing could cause the driver to lose control of your arms slightly bent at the elbows
the vehicle. you can move your legs freely
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the all displays (including malfunction and
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* indicator lamps) on the instrument
Manually adjust the angle of the head re- from the starter switch, take it with you, and cluster are clearly visible
straint. lock the vehicle.
Push or pull on the lower edge of the Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey
head restraint cushion. with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
For more information on seats, see Seats starter switch or the SmartKey with
( page 124). KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the steering wheel adjustment feature can
be operated when the drivers door is open.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A childs unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.

46
Getting started
Adjusting

Steering wheel adjustment Adjusting steering wheel in or out Easy-entry/exit feature


The steering wheel adjustment stalk is Move stalk forward or back in direction This feature allows for easier entry into and
located on the lower left of the steering of arrow 1 until a comfortable steer- exit from the vehicle. When entering and
column. ing wheel position is reached with your exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in
arms slightly bent at the elbow. its uppermost position.
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activat-
Adjusting steering wheel up or down
ed or deactivated in the Convenience sub-
Move stalk up or down in direction of menu of the control system ( page 166).
arrow 2.
Warning! G
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
1 Adjusting steering wheel, in or out wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
2 Adjusting steering wheel, up or down activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
the following:
or
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
Open the drivers door. ( page 47).
Press one of the memory position but-
tons* or the memory button M*
( page 129).

47
Getting started
Adjusting

With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,


Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you Warning! G
Children could open the drivers door and remove the SmartKey from the starter Let the system complete the adjustment
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit switch procedure before setting the vehicle in mo-
feature, which could result in an accident tion. All steering wheel adjustment must be
or
and/or serious personal injury. completed before setting the vehicle in mo-
open the drivers door with the
tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, SmartKey in starter switch position 0
adjusting could cause the driver to lose con-
the steering wheel will return to its last set or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
trol of the vehicle.
position when you: button in position 1 ( page 41)

close the drivers door with the ignition i If the current position for the steering wheel
switched on is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering
wheel will no longer be able to move upward
or when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated.
insert the SmartKey into the starter The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO* when the engine is started.
start/stop button ( page 41) once
with the drivers door closed
i The last set steering wheel position is stored
when
the ignition is switched off ( page 40)
the position is stored in memory
( page 129)

48
Getting started
Adjusting

Mirrors The buttons are located on the lower part ! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
of the center console. pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
mirrors before driving so that you have a it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
good view of the road and traffic condi- place. The mirror housing is then properly posi-
tions. tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
manner.
Interior rear view mirror i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior
rear view mirrors will be heated automatically.
Manually adjust the interior rear view
mirror. i The memory function ( page 129) lets you
store the setting for the exterior rear view
For more information, see Rear view mir-
mirrors together with the settings for the
rors ( page 185). 1 Drivers side exterior rear view mirror steering wheel and the drivers seat position.
button For more information, see Good visibility
Exterior rear view mirrors 2 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir- ( page 185).
ror button
Warning! G 3 Adjustment button
Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
Exercise care when using the
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror. Press button 1 or button 2 to select
The mirror surface is convex (outwardly the desired exterior rear view mirror.
curved surface for a wider field of view). Ob- Push adjustment button 3 up, down,
jects in mirror are closer than they appear. left, or right according to the desired
Check your interior rear view mirror or setting.
glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.

49
Getting started
Driving

Fastening the seat belts


Warning! G In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
death is lessened if you are wearing your
Make sure that absolutely no objects are Warning! G seat belt. The air bags can only provide the
protection they were designed to afford if
obstructing the pedals range of movement.
Keep the drivers footwell clear of all obsta- the occupants are using their seat belts
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in ( page 68).
off. Always make sure your passenger is
the footwell, make sure the pedals still have properly restrained.
sufficient clearance.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and Warning! G
During sudden driving or braking maneu- position your seat belt greatly increases
vers, the objects could get caught between your risk of injuries and their likely severity Children 12 years old and under must be
the pedals. You could then no longer brake in an accident. You and your passenger seated and properly secured in an appropri-
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents should always wear seat belts. ate infant restraint, toddler restraint, or
or injury. booster seat recommended for the size and
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without weight of the child. For additional informa-
your seat belt properly buckled. Without tion, see Children in the vehicle
your seat belt buckled, you are much more ( page 84).
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured significantly increased if the child restraints
or killed. are not properly secured in the vehicle and
the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.

50
Getting started
Driving

With a smooth motion, pull the seat


Warning! G Warning! G belt from seat belt housing 1.
Place the shoulder portion of the seat
Never let more people ride in the vehicle Read and observe the additional warning no-
than there are seat belts available. Be sure tices in the Safety and Security section belt across the top of your shoulder
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly ( page 79). and the lap portion across your hips.
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3 until
use a seat belt for more than one person at it clicks.
a time.
If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
up.
Warning! G
To release the seat belt, press release
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat button 4 and guide latch plate back to
backrest in an excessively reclined position seat belt housing 1.
as this can be dangerous. You could slide
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at
the abdomen or neck. That could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
rest and seat belt provide the best restraint
when the wearer is in a position that is as
upright as possible and the seat belt is prop- 1 Seat belt housing
erly positioned on the body. 2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button

51
Getting started
Driving

Proper use of seat belts Do not fasten a seat belt around a per-
Do not twist the seat belt when fasten-
son and another object at the same Warning! G
time. When using a seat belt to secure
ing. Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
infant restraints, toddler restraints or
Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder children in booster seats, always follow They could tear.
portion is located as close as possible the child seat manufacturers instruc- Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in
to the middle of the shoulder (it should tions. the door or in the seat adjustment
not touch the neck). Never pass the mechanism. This could damage the
Check your seat belt during travel to
shoulder portion of the seat belt under seat belt.
make sure that it is properly
your arm.
positioned. Never attempt to make modifications to
Position the lap belt as low as possible seat belts. This could impair the effective-
Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
on your hips (over hip joint) and not ness of the seat belts.
across the abdomen. snugly. Take special care of this when
wearing loose clothing. Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
Place the seat backrest in a position severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
that is as upright as possible. not be able to provide adequate protection.
Never use a seat belt for more than one Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
person at a time. highly stressed in an accident must be
replaced. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

52
Getting started
Driving

Starting the engine Automatic transmission Starting with the SmartKey


Make sure the gear selector lever is set
Warning! G to P.
Do not depress the accelerator.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
to position 3 and hold until the engine
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
starts ( page 40).
consciousness and possible death.
Do not run the engine in confined areas i You can also use the touch-start function.
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it
(such as a garage) which are not properly
again immediately. The engine then starts auto-
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission matically.
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
have the cause determined and corrected P Park position with gear selector lever For information on turning off the engine
immediately. If you must drive under these lock with the SmartKey, see Turning off with
conditions, drive with at least one window R Reverse gear the SmartKey ( page 64).
fully open. N Neutral
D Drive position
For more information, see Automatic
transmission ( page 172).

53
Getting started
Driving

Starting with KEYLESS-GO* For information on turning off the engine


with KEYLESS-GO, see Turning off with
Warning! G KEYLESS-GO* ( page 64).

As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO Starting difficulties


is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started. If the engine does not start as described,
Therefore, never leave children unattended carry out the following steps:
in the vehicle, as they could otherwise
If you are starting the engine with the
accidentally start the engine.
SmartKey: Turn SmartKey in starter
When leaving the vehicle, always take the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button switch to position 0 and repeat starting
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and procedure.
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children 1 USA only
2 Canada only If you are starting the engine with
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that
an unlocked vehicle. Make sure the gear selector lever is set
may be open to allow for better detec-
to P.
tion of the SmartKey with
You can start your vehicle without the Depress the brake pedal during the KEYLESS-GO*.
SmartKey in the starter switch using the starting procedure. Do not depress ac- Or:
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button on the celerator. Start the engine with the SmartKey as
gear selector lever. radio signals from another source may
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be button once. be interfering with the SmartKey with
located in the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO*.
The engine starts if the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle.

54
Getting started
Driving

Repeat the starting procedure Parking brake


( page 53). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
Get a jump start ( page 432).
Warning! G
If the engine does not start after several When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
starting attempts, there could be a mal- SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
function in the engine electronics or in the from the starter switch, take it with you, and
fuel supply system. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
an unlocked vehicle. Children could release 1 Release handle
the parking brake, which could result in an
Release the parking brake by pulling on
accident and/or serious personal injury.
release handle 1.
The brake warning lamp ; (USA
only) or 3 (Canada only) in the
instrument cluster goes out.

55
Getting started
Driving

Driving off i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic


Warning! G central locking system engages and the locking
Depress the brake pedal. knobs drop down.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift You can deactivate the automatic locking using
Place the gear selector lever in
in order to obtain braking action. This could the control system ( page 166).
position D or R.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
You can open a locked door from the inside.
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not Open door only when conditions are safe to do
Warning! G prevent this type of loss of control. so.

It is dangerous to shift the gear selector le- After a cold start, the transmission en-
ver out of P or N if the engine speed is high-
! In order to avoid damage to the gages at a higher revolution. This allows
transmission: the catalytic converter to reach its operat-
er than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
Wait for the gear selection process to com- ing temperature earlier.
on the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
plete before setting the vehicle in motion.
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You ! Do not run cold engine at high engine speed.
could lose control of the vehicle and hit Place the gear selector lever in position P
Running a cold engine at high engine speed may
or R only when the vehicle is stopped.
someone or something. Only shift into gear shorten the service life of the engine.
when the engine is idling normally and when Release the brake pedal.
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal. ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
Carefully depress the accelerator pedal and applying the brakes reduces engine
pedal. performance and causes premature brake and
drivetrain wear.
! If you hear a warning signal and the
message Release Parking Brake appears in
the multifunction display when driving off, you
have forgotten to release the parking brake.
Release the parking brake ( page 55).

56
Getting started
Driving

Switching on headlamps High beam Turn signals


The combination switch is located on the
The combination switch is located on the
Low beam headlamps left of the steering column.
left of the steering column.
The exterior lamp switch is located on the
dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

Combination switch
Combination switch
1 High beam
1 Turn signals, right
Exterior lamp switch 2 High beam flasher
2 Turn signals, left
1 Off Push the combination switch in
Press the combination switch in
2 Low beam headlamps on direction of arrow 1.
direction of arrow 1 or 2.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to The high beam headlamps and the high
The corresponding turn signal indicator
position B. beam headlamp indicator lamp A in
lamp L or K in the instrument
the instrument cluster come on
The low beam headlamps come on. cluster flashes ( page 26).
( page 29).
For more information on headlamps, see
Lighting ( page 131).

57
Getting started
Driving

The combination switch resets automati- Windshield wipers ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
cally after major steering wheel move- the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
ments. The combination switch is located on the a windshield might scratch the glass and/or
left of the steering column. damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on
i To signal minor directional changes such as a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
changing lanes, press combination switch only windshield wipers in dry weather conditions,
to point of resistance and release. always operate the windshield wipers with
The corresponding turn signals will flash three windshield washer fluid ( page 60).
times.
! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
(leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off imme-
diately.
For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and
remove the SmartKey from the starter
Combination switch switch
1 Switching on windshield wipers or
2 Single wipe turn off the engine by pressing the
Wiping with windshield washer fluid KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
open the drivers door (with the drivers
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). door open, the starter switch is in
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch)
before attempting to remove any blockage.
Remove blockage.
Turn the windshield wipers on again.

58
Getting started
Driving

If the windshield wipers fail to function at all with Intermittent wiping i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
the combination switch in position I, vehicle is at a standstill and a door is opened.
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
set the combination switch to the next This protects persons getting into or out of the
wet weather conditions or in the presence vehicle from being sprayed.
higher wiper speed
of precipitation.
have the windshield wipers checked at the Intermittent wiping will be continued when
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center ! Do not leave windshield wipers on an inter- all doors are closed
mittent setting when the vehicle is taken to an
automatic car wash or during windshield clean- and
Switching on windshield wipers
ing. Windshield wipers will operate in the pres- the gear selector lever is in position D or R
Turn the combination switch in ence of water sprayed on the windshield, and or
direction of arrow 1 to the desired windshield wipers may be damaged as a result.
position, depending on the intensity of the wiper setting is changed using the
the rain. ! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on combination switch
the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects
0 Windshield wipers off may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an Single wipe
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
I Intermittent wiping windshield wiper blades or scratch the wind- Press the combination switch briefly in
II Normal wiper speed shield. You should therefore switch off the wind- direction of arrow 2 ( page 58) to
shield wipers when weather conditions are dry. the resistance point.
III Fast wiper speed
Turn the combination switch in The windshield wipers wipe one time
direction of arrow 1 to position I. without washer fluid.
After the initial wipe, pauses between
wipes are automatically controlled by the
rain sensor.

59
Getting started
Driving

Wiping with windshield washer fluid Problems while driving The coolant temperature gauge is
above 248F (120C)
Press the combination switch in
direction of arrow 2 ( page 58) past The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
the resistance point. cooling the engine.
An ignition cable may be damaged.
The windshield wipers operate with Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in
The engine electronics may not be
washer fluid. a safe location and turn off the engine.
operating properly.
Allow engine and coolant to cool off.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or Unburned gasoline may have entered
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with wind- Check the coolant level and add cool-
the catalytic converter and damaged it.
shield washer fluid every now and then even ant if necessary ( page 288).
when it is raining. Give very little gas.
For information on filling up the washer Have the problem repaired by an
reservoir, see Windshield washer system authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
and headlamp cleaning system as soon as possible.
( page 289).

60
Getting started
Driving

In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking gasoline:
Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
Notify local fire and/or police
authorities.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
If no damage can be determined on the
major assemblies
fuel system
engine mount:
Start the engine in the usual manner.

61
Getting started
Parking and locking

You have now completed your first drive.


You have properly stopped and parked Warning! G When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
bustible materials such as grass, hay or KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch
Warning! G leaves can come into contact with the hot position 0 and remove, or press the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
exhaust system, as these materials could be
With the engine not running, there is no Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
power assistance for the brake and steering KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
systems. In this case, it is important to keep To reduce the risk of personal injury or when leaving.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result
effort is necessary to brake and steer the of vehicle movement, before turning off the
vehicle. engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Keep right foot on brake pedal.
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Slowly release brake pedal.

62
Getting started
Parking and locking

Parking brake Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1.


When the engine is running, the indica-
Warning! G
tor lamp ; (USA only) or 3
Warning! G (Canada only) in the instrument cluster
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear se-
lector lever not fully engaged in position P is
will be illuminated. dangerous. Also, when parked on an incline,
Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to position P alone may not prevent your vehi-
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle Warning! G cle from moving, possibly hitting people or
and cause an accident. In addition, the objects.
vehicles brake lights do not light up when When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Always set the parking brake in addition to
the parking brake is engaged. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* shifting to position P ( page 174).
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- When parked on an incline, also turn front
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an wheels towards the road curb.
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
parking brake and/or move the gear selec- Switching off headlamps
tor lever from position P, either of which
could result in an accident and/or serious Turn the exterior lamp switch to
personal injury. position M ( page 131).

1 Parking brake pedal

63
Getting started
Parking and locking

Turning off the engine Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* Releasing seat belts
Place the gear selector lever in
Place the gear selector lever in Press the seat belt release button
position P.
position P. ( page 51).
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
Apply the parking brake ( page 63). Allow the retractor to completely
ton ( page 41) to turn off the engine.
rewind the seat belt by guiding the
i Always set the parking brake in addition to With the drivers door closed, the latch plate.
shifting to position P.
starter switch is now in position 1. With
When parked on an incline, also turn front the drivers door opened, the starter ! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
wheels towards the road curb. the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
switch is set to position 0, same as caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
SmartKey removed from starter switch mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
Turning off with the SmartKey ( page 40). impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch cause damage to the door and/or door trim
to position 0 ( page 40). i If you hear a warning signal you have tried to panel. Such damage is not covered by the
turn off the engine while the gear selector lever Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Remove the SmartKey from the starter was not in P.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
switch. In addition, the message Gear Selector an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Lever To P appears in the multifunction
The immobilizer is activated.
display.
i The SmartKey can only be removed from the Place the gear selector lever in position P.
starter switch with the gear selector lever in
position P.

i With the SmartKey removed and the drivers


door open, a warning sounds if the vehicles
exterior lamps are not switched off.

64
Getting started
Parking and locking

Locking Exit the vehicle and close the doors and i If you hear a warning signal, you have forgot-
the trunk. ten to switch off the low beam headlamps or the
parking lamps before opening the drivers door.
Warning! G Opening a door causes its window to open
slightly. It will fully close when the door is In addition, the message Lights Are Still
On appears in the multifunction display.
shut.
To prevent possible personal injury, always Switch off the low beam headlamps or the
keep hands and fingers away from the door ! A side window will not work if it is blocked parking lamps.
openings when closing the doors. Be espe- with ice or if the battery needs charging. If you
If the message Switch off lights or
cially careful when small children are cannot shut a door, do not force it or you could
remove key. appears in the multifunction
around. damage the door or the side window.
display, remove the SmartKey from the starter
Fix whatever is affecting the window before
Before closing doors, make sure that there switch or switch off the automatic headlamp
trying to shut the door.
mode.
is no possibility of someone getting caught
in a door during closing. ! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps when
leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
battery.
Warning! G i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: A warning
signal and the message Remember your key.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the remind you not to leave the SmartKey with
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised
access to a vehicle could result in an
accident and/or serious personal injury.

65
Getting started
Parking and locking

Locking with the SmartKey Locking with KEYLESS-GO* Press lock button 1 on an outside
door handle.
Press the lock button on the
SmartKey ( page 38). With the trunk and both doors closed:
With the trunk and both doors closed: All turn signal lamps flash three
times.
All turn signal lamps flash three
times. An acoustic warning sounds three
times.
An acoustic warning sounds three
times. The locking knobs in the doors
move down.
The locking knobs in the doors
move down. 1 Lock button The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
The anti-theft alarm system is
armed. For more information, see SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* ( page 108).
For more information, see Locking and
unlocking ( page 104).

66
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems

67
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

In this section you will learn the most im- Air bag system components with The SRS system conducts a self-test when
portant facts about the restraint systems the ignition is switched on and in regular
Passenger front air bag off indicator
of the vehicle. intervals while the engine is running. This
lamp ( page 78)
facilitates detection of malfunctions.
The restraint systems are
Passenger seat with Occupant The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument
Seat belts ( page 79) Classification System (OCS) cluster comes on when the ignition is
( page 74) switched on and goes out no later than a
Child restraints ( page 85)
Although independent systems, their few seconds after the engine has been
Additional protection potential provided by started.
protective functions work in conjunction
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) with each other. The SRS components are in operational
with readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
i For information on infants and children
Air bags ( page 70) traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint lit when the engine is running.
Air bag control unit (with crash systems for infants and children, see Children A malfunction in the system has been
in the vehicle ( page 84).
sensors) detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
Emergency Tensioning Device fails to go out after approximately
(ETD) for seat belts ( page 82) 4 seconds after the engine was started
Roll bar ( page 83) does not come on at all
comes on after the engine was started
or while driving

68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G Warning! G If it is necessary to modify an air bag system


to accommodate a person with disabilities,
Modifications to or work improperly con- In the event that the 1 indicator lamp contact your local authorized
ducted on restraint systems (such as seat comes on during driving or does not come Mercedes-Benz Center or call our Customer
belts and anchors, emergency tensioning on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags) malfunction. For your safety, we strongly (1-800-367-6372) for details.
or their wiring, as well as tampering with in- recommend that you contact an authorized
terconnected electronic systems, can lead Mercedes-Benz Center immediately to have
to the restraint systems no longer function- the system checked; otherwise the SRS may
ing as intended. not deploy when needed in an accident,
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices, which could result in serious or fatal injury,
for example, could deploy inadvertently or or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
fail to deploy in accidents although the de- essarily which could also result in injury.
celeration threshold for air bag deployment In addition, improper repair work on the SRS
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re- creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-
straint systems. Do not tamper with elec- tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-
tronic components or their software. ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
be performed by qualified technicians.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Air bags
Warning! G Adjust the drivers seat as far as possi-
ble rearward, still permitting proper
operation of vehicle controls. The dis-
Warning! G To reduce the risk of injury when the front
tance from the center of the drivers
air bags inflate, it is very important for the breastbone to the center of the air bag
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten- driver and passenger to always be in a prop- cover on the steering wheel must be at
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im- erly seated position and to wear their seat least 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You
pacts (front air bags, driver-side knee bag) belts. should be able to accomplish this by a
or side impacts (head-thorax air bags). For maximum protection in the event of a combination of adjustments to the seat
However, no system available today can and steering wheel. If you have any
collision always be in normal seated position
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities. problems, please contact an authorized
with your back against the backrest. Fasten
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The deployment of the air bags temporarily your seat belt and make sure that it is prop-
Do not lean your head or chest close to
releases a small amount of dust from the air erly positioned on your body ( page 50).
the steering wheel or dashboard.
bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious Since the air bag inflates with considerable
to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
speed and force, a proper seating and hands
the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem- ing wheel rim. Placing hands and arms
on steering wheel position will help to keep inside the rim can increase the risk and
porary breathing difficulty for people with you at a safe distance from the air bag. potential severity of hand/arm injury
asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid Occupants who are unbelted, out of position when drivers front air bag inflates.
this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle or too close to the air bag can be seriously
as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any Adjust the passenger seat as far as pos-
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates sible rearward from the dashboard when
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the with great force in the blink of an eye: the seat is occupied.
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
Sit properly belted in a position that is
fresh air by opening a window or door.
as upright as possible with your back
against the seat backrest.

70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Occupants, especially children, should


never lean their heads in the area of the
Warning! G If you believe that, even with the use of
these guidelines, it would be safer for your
door where the head-thorax air bag in- passenger seat occupants to have the pas-
There is a possibility of a head-thorax air bag
flates. This could result in serious inju- senger side head-thorax air bag deactivated,
ries or death should the air bag be related injury if occupants, especially chil-
dren, are not properly seated or restrained then deactivation can be accomplished
deployed. Always sit as upright as possi-
when next to a head-thorax air bag which upon your written election to do so at an
ble, properly use the seat belts and an
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in authorized Mercedes-Benz Center at an
appropriately sized infant restraint,
toddler restraint, or booster seat order to do its job. additional cost.
recommended for the size and weight of Please contact your local authorized
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
the child. Mercedes-Benz Center or call the Customer
follow these guidelines:
Failure to follow these instructions can Assistance Center (in the USA) at
(1) Occupants, especially children, should 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
result in severe injuries to you or other
never place their bodies or lean their or Customer Service (in Canada) at
occupants.
heads in the area of the door where the 1-800-387-0100 for details.
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that head-thorax air bag inflates. This could
you make the buyer aware of this safety in- result in serious injuries or death should
formation. Be sure to give the buyer this the head-thorax air bag be deployed. i Air bags are designed to activate only in cer-
Operators Manual. tain frontal impacts (front air bags, driver-side
(2) Always sit as upright as possible, prop- knee bag) and side impacts (head-thorax air
erly use the seat belts and for children bags) which exceed preset thresholds. Only
12 years old or under, use an appropri- during these events, will they provide their
ately sized infant restraint, toddler supplemental protection.
restraint, or booster seat recommended The driver and passenger should always wear
for the size and weight of the child. their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for
the air bags to provide their supplemental
(3) Always wear seat belts properly. protection.

71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

In case of other types of impacts and impacts be-


Air bags and Emergency Tensioning No modifications of any kind may be
low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will
not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be Devices (ETDs) contain Perchlorate made to any components or wiring of
protected to the extent possible by a properly material, which may require special han- the SRS. This includes changing or
fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt dling and regard for the environment. removing any component or part of the
is also needed to provide the best possible Check with your local governments SRS, the installation of additional trim
protection in a rollover. disposal guidelines. California residents, material, badges, etc. over the steering
see http://www.dtsc.ca.gov/Hazard- wheel hub, passenger front air bag
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the
ousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm. cover, door frame trims, or door trim
air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning panels, and installation of additional
It is important to your safety and that of your pas- electrical/electronic equipment on or
senger that you replace deployed air bags and Devices (ETDs) are designed to function
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or near SRS components and wiring. Keep
repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure area between air bags and occupants
that the vehicle will continue to provide supple- ETD that has deployed must be re-
placed. free from objects (e.g. packages,
mental crash protection for occupants. purses, umbrellas, etc.).
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt, Air bag system components will be hot
They could tear.
emergency tensioning device and after an air bag has inflated. Do not
Do not make any modification that could touch.
air bag change the effectiveness of the seat
Never place your feet on the instrument
belts.
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
Warning! G Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this keep both feet on the floor in front of the
may severely weaken them. In a crash, seat.
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that they may not be able to provide ade-
were highly stressed in an accident quate protection.
must be replaced and their anchoring
points must also be checked. Only use
seat belts installed or supplied by an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Front air bags i The front air bags in this vehicle have been
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the
inoperative or causing unintended air air bag to have different rates of inflation that are
based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera-
bag deployment. Work on the SRS must
tion as assessed by the air bag control unit.
therefore only be performed by qualified
technicians. Contact an authorized On the passenger side, the front air bag deploy-
Mercedes-Benz Center. ment is additionally influenced by the passen-
gers weight category as identified by the
For your protection and the protection Occupant Classification System (OCS)
of others, when scrapping the air bag ( page 74).
unit or emergency tensioning device,
The lighter the passenger side occupant, the
our safety instructions must be
higher the vehicle deceleration rate required for
followed. These instructions are 1 Driver air bag the second stage inflation of the air bag.
available from any authorized 2 Passenger air bag
Mercedes-Benz Center.
3 Knee bag The air bags will not deploy in impacts
Given the considerable deployment which do not exceed the systems
speed, required inflation volume, and Driver and passenger air bags and drivers deployment thresholds. You will then be
the textile structure of the air bags, side knee bag are deployed: protected by the fastened seat belts.
there is the possibility of abrasions or in the event of certain frontal impacts
other, potentially more serious injuries
resulting from air bag deployment. if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
When you sell your vehicle, we strongly independently of the head-thorax air
urge you to give notice to the subsequent bags
owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
alerting them to the applicable section in
the Operators Manual.

73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

The passenger air bag will only be de- Head-thorax air bags Occupant Classification System
ployed if:
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
the system, based on OCS weight
automatically turns the passenger front air
sensor readings, senses that the
bag on or off based on the classified occu-
passenger seat is occupied
pant weight category determined by
the 5/ indicator lamp in the weight sensor readings from the
center console is not lit ( page 78) passenger seat.
the impact exceeds a preset deploy- i The system does not deactivate the
ment threshold head-thorax air bag and the emergency tension-
ing device.
Knee bag 1 Head-thorax air bag
Occupants must sit properly belted in a
The knee bag is located on the drivers side The head-thorax air bags are deployed: position that is as upright as possible with
lower instrument panel. It is designed to in side impacts exceeding a preset their back against the seat backrest and
operate together with the driver front air deployment threshold feet on the floor to be correctly classified.
bag in certain frontal impacts exceeding a If the occupants weight is transferred to
preset threshold. The knee bag operates on the impacted side of the vehicle another object in the vehicle (e.g. by
best in conjunction with a properly posi- independently of the front air bags leaning on armrests), the OCS may not be
tioned and fastened seat belt. able to properly approximate the
The head-thorax air bags are not deployed
occupants weight category.
in impacts which do not exceed the sys-
tems deployment threshold.

74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

i If the seat, including the trim cover and


cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take Warning! G When the OCS senses that the passenger
seat occupant is classified as being up to or
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center. If the 5/ indicator lamp illuminates less than the weight of a typical
when an adult or someone larger than a 12-month-old child in a standard child
Only use seat accessories approved by
small individual is in the passenger seat, restraint, the 5/ indicator lamp will
Mercedes-Benz.
have the passenger re-position himself or illuminate when the engine is started and
Both driver and the passenger should remain illuminated, indicating that the pas-
herself in the seat until the 5/ indi-
always use the 5/ indicator lamp senger front air bag is deactivated.
cator lamp goes out.
as an indication of whether or not the
More information about air bag display When the OCS senses that the passenger
passenger is properly positioned.
messages ( page 368). seat is classified as being empty, the
5/ indicator lamp will illuminate
In the event of a collision, the air bag control when the engine is started and remain
unit will not allow passenger front air bag illuminated, indicating that the passenger
deployment when the OCS classified the front air bag is deactivated.
passenger seat occupant as being up to or
less than the weight of a typical
12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or if the passenger seat is sensed
as being empty.

75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When the OCS senses that the passenger


seat occupant is classified as being heavier
If the 5/ indicator lamp is
illuminated, the passenger front air bag is
Warning! G
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old deactivated and will not be deployed. Children 12 years old and under must be
child seated in a standard child restraint or If the 5/ indicator lamp is not seated and properly secured in an appropri-
as being a small individual (such as a young illuminated, the passenger front air bag is ate infant or child restraint recommended
teenager or a small adult), the activated and will be deployed: for the size and weight of the child.
5/ indicator lamp will illuminate for
in the event of certain frontal impacts The infant or child restraint must be properly
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
started and then, depending on occupant if impact exceeds a preset deployment secured with the vehicles seat belt fully in
weight sensor readings from the seat, re- threshold accordance with the child seat manufactur-
ers instructions.
main illuminated or go out. With the independently of the head-thorax air
5/ indicator lamp illuminated, the bags Children can be killed or seriously injured by
passenger front air bag is deactivated. With If the passenger front air bag is deployed, an inflating air bag. Note the following
the 5/ indicator lamp out, the pas- the rate of inflation will be influenced by: important information:
senger front air bag is activated. Your vehicle is equipped with air bag
the rate of relevant vehicle deceleration
When the OCS senses that the passenger as assessed by the air bag control unit technology designed to turn off the pas-
seat occupant is classified as an adult or senger front air bag in your vehicle when
the passengers weight category as
someone larger than a small individual, the the system senses the weight of a typi-
identified by the Occupant Classification cal 12-month-old child or less along with
5/ indicator lamp will illuminate for System (OCS) the weight of a standard appropriate
approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
child restraint on the passenger seat.
started and then go out, indicating that the
passenger front air bag is activated.

76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

A child in a rear-facing child restraint on If you place a child in a forward-facing i Deployment of the driver front air bag does
the passenger seat will be seriously in- child restraint on the passenger seat, not mean that the passenger front air bag also
jured or even killed if the passenger move the seat as far back as possible, should have deployed.
front air bag inflates in a collision which use the proper child restraint recom- The Occupant Classification System ( page 74)
could occur under some circumstances, mended for the age, size and weight of may have determined:
even with the air bag technology in- the child, and secure child restraint with that the seat was empty or occupied by the
stalled in your vehicle. the vehicles seat belt according to the weight up to or less than that of a typical
If you install a rear-facing child restraint child seat manufacturers instructions. 12-month-old child seated in a standard
on the passenger seat, make sure that For children larger than the typical child restraint both instances where the
the 5/ indicator lamp is illumi- 12-month-old child, the passenger front system suppresses deployment of the pas-
air bag may or may not be activated senger front air bag even though the impact
nated, indicating that the passenger
front air bag is deactivated. Should the ( page 74). met the criteria and was of sufficient severity
to deploy the driver front air bag.
5/ indicator lamp not illuminate
or go out while the restraint is installed, that the seat was occupied by a small individ-
please check installation. Periodically ual (such as a young teenager or a small
check the 5/ indicator lamp adult) or a child weighing more than the
while driving to make sure the weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a
5/ indicator lamp is illuminated. standard child restraint instances where
the system may suppress deployment of the
If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out
passenger front air bag even though the
or remains out, do not transport a child
impact met the criteria and was of sufficient
on the passenger seat until the system
severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
has been repaired. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger seat will be seriously injured
or even killed if the passenger front air
bag inflates.

77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

The 5/ indicator lamp is located in


the upper part of the center console, be- Warning! G Read and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
tween the center air vents.
If the 1 indicator lamp and the
5/ indicator lamp are lit at the same Self-test Occupant Classification
time, there is a malfunction in the Occupant System
Classification System. The passenger front After turning the SmartKey in the starter
air bag will be deactivated in this case. Have switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
the system checked as soon as possible by KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized twice, the 5/ indicator lamp
Mercedes-Benz Center. located in the upper part of the center
Only have the seat repaired or replaced by console, between the center air vents
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
1 Passenger front air bag off indicator sitting on the passenger seat and the
In order to ensure proper operation of the
lamp system senses the occupant as being an
air bag system and OCS:
adult, the 5/ indicator lamp will
The 5/ indicator lamp 1 will be Sit properly belted in a position that is illuminate and go out after
illuminated, except with the SmartKey as upright as possible with your back approximately 6 seconds.
removed or in starter switch position 0. against the seat backrest.
If the seat is not occupied and the system
While seated, an occupant should not
senses the passenger seat as being empty,
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the occupants weight to be lifted the 5/ indicator lamp will
from the seat bottom as this may result illuminate and not go out.
in the OCS to be unable to correctly
approximate the occupants weight
category.

78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Seat belts
Warning! G Warning! G
The use of seat belts and infant and child
If the 5/ indicator lamp should not restraint systems is required by law in all Always fasten your seat belt before driving
illuminate, the system is not functioning. 50 states, the District of Columbia, the off. Always make sure your passenger is
You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz U.S. territories and all Canadian provinces. properly restrained.
Center before seating any child on the Failure to wear and properly fasten and
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
passenger seat. position your seat belt greatly increases
occupants should have their seat belts
fastened whenever the vehicle is in your risk of injuries and their likely severity
More information can be found in the motion. in an accident. You and your passenger
Practical hints section ( page 357). should always wear seat belts.
For information on fastening seat belts,
see Fastening the seat belts ( page 50). If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
Warning! G can be considerably more severe without
i For information on infants and children your seat belt properly buckled. Without
Never place anything between seat cushion traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint your seat belt buckled, you are much more
systems for infants and children, see Children
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
in the vehicle ( page 84).
the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi- ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
cation System. The bottom of the child seat or killed.
must make full contact with the passenger In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child death is lessened if you are properly wearing
seat could cause injuries to the child in case your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as
of an accident, instead of increasing protec- they are designed if the occupants are
tion for the child. properly wearing their seat belts.
Follow the manufacturers instructions for
installation of child seats.

79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G


Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Never let more people ride in the vehicle Damaged seat belts or seat belts that were
backrest in an excessively reclined position than there are seat belts available. Make highly stressed in an accident must be re-
as this can be dangerous. You could slide sure everyone riding in the vehicle is placed and their anchoring points must also
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide correctly restrained with a separate seat be checked.
under it, the seat belt would apply force at belt. Never use a seat belt for more than one Only use seat belts which have been
the abdomen or neck. This could cause person at a time. approved by Mercedes-Benz.
serious or even fatal injuries. The seat back-
rest and seat belt provide the best restraint Do not make any modifications to the seat
when the wearer is in a position that is as belts. This can lead to unintended activation
upright as possible and the seat belt is prop- of the ETDs or to their failure to activate
erly positioned on the body. when necessary.

Keep door storage compartments closed Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
while vehicle is in motion. Failure to do so severely weaken them. In a crash, they may
may cause the seat belt to catch at the rear not be able to provide adequate protection.
and prevent proper positioning of the seat Have all work carried out only by qualified
belt. technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

80
Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Operators Manual
SL-Class

SL-Class
2 3 0 5 8 4 2 5 9 6

Order No. 6515 3069 13 Part No. 230 584 25 96 Edition A 2008
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Warning! G Never wear the shoulder belt under your


arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
Seat belts should not be worn twisted.
In a crash, you would not have the full
der. In a frontal crash, your body would width of the seat belt to manage impact
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
move too far forward. That would forces. The twisted seat belt against
Seat belts can only work when used increase the chance of head and neck your body could cause injuries.
properly. Never wear seat belts in any injuries. The shoulder belt would also Pregnant women should also always use
other way than as described in this apply too much force to the ribs or abdo- a lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
section, as that could result in serious men, which could severely injure inter- should be positioned as low as possible
injuries in case of an accident. nal organs such as your liver or spleen. on the hips to avoid any possible
Each occupant should wear their seat Never wear seat belts over rigid or pressure on the abdomen.
belt at all times, because seat belts help breakable objects in or on your clothing, Never place your feet on the instrument
reduce the likelihood of and potential such as eyeglasses, pens, keys, etc., as panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always
severity of injuries in accidents, includ- these might cause injuries. keep both feet on the floor in front of the
ing rollovers. The integrated restraint Position the lap belt as low as possible seat.
system includes SRS (driver air bag, on your hips and not across the abdo-
driver-side knee bag, passenger front air When using a seat belt to secure infant
men. If the lap belt is positioned across or toddler restraints or children in
bag, head-thorax air bags) and ETD (seat your abdomen, it could cause serious in-
belt emergency tensioning device). The booster seats, always follow the child
juries in a crash. seat manufacturers instructions.
system is designed to enhance the
protection offered to properly belted Never use a seat belt for more than one
occupants in certain frontal (front air person at a time. Do not fasten a seat
bags, driver-side knee bag and ETD) and belt around a person and another
side (head-thorax air bags and ETD) im- person or other objects.
pacts which exceed preset deployment
thresholds.

81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Enhanced seat belt reminder system intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds Emergency tensioning device (ETD),
or until the drivers and passengers seat belt force limiter
When the engine is started, the seat belt
seat belts are fastened.
telltale < will always illuminate for The seat belts are equipped with
6 seconds to remind you and your pas- If the drivers or the passengers seat emergency tensioning devices and belt
senger to fasten your seat belts. belt remain unfastened after force limiters.
60 seconds, the warning chime stops
If the drivers seat belt is not fastened The ETD is designed to activate in the
sounding. The seat belt telltale <
when the engine is started, an additional following cases:
stops flashing but continues to be
warning chime will also sound for a
illuminated. in frontal or rear-end impacts
maximum of 6 seconds or until the drivers
exceeding the system deployment
seat belt is fastened. The seat belt telltale < will only go out
threshold
if both the drivers and the passengers
If after these 6 seconds, the drivers or the
seat belt (with the passenger seat occu- if the restraint systems are operational
passengers seat belt (with the passenger
pied) are fastened, or the vehicle is stand- and functioning correctly, see
seat occupied) are not fastened with both
ing still and a door is opened. 1 indicator lamp ( page 68)
doors closed,
For more information, see the Practical in certain vehicle rollovers if the
the seat belt telltale < remains
hints section ( page 352). system determines an additional
illuminated for as long as either the
degree of protection
drivers or passengers seat belt is not
fastened. i The ETDs will only activate if the seat belts
are fastened (latch plate properly inserted into
and if the vehicle speed once exceeds buckle).
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing

82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When activated, emergency tensioning Roll bar i When the roll bar is raised automatically,
devices remove slack from the seat belts in you will hear a ratcheting sound.
such a way that the seat belts fit more
snugly against the body. Seat belt force Warning! G You can also raise and lower the roll bar
manually using the buttons provided.
limiters reduce the force exerted by the
seat belts on occupants during a crash. This vehicle is a two occupant vehicle. The The buttons for the roll bar are on the cen-
rear storage area is not intended for use by ter console under the retractable hardtop
occupants and is not equipped for properly switch.
Warning! G seating or restraining occupants. Thus this
area should never be used by any persons.
An emergency tensioning device (ETD) that
was activated must be replaced. Make sure that the roll bars path is clear
and no persons are injured by the moving
When disposing of the emergency tension-
roll bar. Raising or lowering of the roll bar
ing device, our safety instructions must be
could injure someone in its proximity.
followed. These are available at any
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. For your own safety, we recommend to drive
with the roll bar raised if the outside temper-
ature is below +5F (-15C).
Automatic comfort-fit feature seat belt
1 Raise roll bar
The automatic comfort-fit feature reduces
the retracting force of the seat belts when
! If the outside temperature falls below 2 Lower roll bar
+5F (-15C), the roll bar must be raised manu-
they are in normal use. ally using the buttons provided to avoid damag- The roll bar can be moved manually when
ing the hydraulics. the ignition is switched on ( page 40).
The roll bar raises automatically in an acci-
dent or in a critical driving situation.

83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Lowering the roll bar Children in the vehicle


Warning! G Lift the switch for the retractable hard-
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
If the roll bar warning lamp \ in the top.
the vehicle:
instrument cluster does not go out after If the roll bar was raised manually:
Secure the child using an infant or child
starting the engine, flickers, or if it comes on
Press and hold button 2 until the roll restraint appropriate to the age and
while driving, the roll bar system is not
bar is lowered. size of the child.
operating properly and may not activate in
an accident. At the same time, the message If the roll bar was raised automatically: Make sure the infant or child is
Raise Roll-over Bar appears in the Press and hold button 1 until you hear properly secured at all times while
multifunction display. In this case, raise the the roll bar lock into place. the vehicle is in motion.
roll bar manually before continuing to drive.
Press and hold button 2 until the roll
For safety reasons, drive only with the roll
bar is lowered. Warning! G
bar raised until the malfunction has been
repaired. Have your vehicle checked at an i If you have raised the roll bar manually using Do not leave children unattended in the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. the button, the roll bar will automatically be low- vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
ered and then raised again when you close and restraint system. The children could
open the retractable hardtop.
Raising the roll bar injure themselves on parts of the vehicle
Lift the switch for the retractable hard- be seriously or fatally injured through
top. excessive exposure to extreme heat or
cold
Press and hold button 1 until the roll
bar is raised.

84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

Infant and child restraint systems


Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint systems We recommend all infants and children be
Warning! G
metal parts, for example, could become very properly restrained at all times while the Never release the seat belt buckle while the
hot, and the child could be burned on these vehicle is in motion. vehicle is in motion, since the special seat
parts. belt retractor will be deactivated.
The passenger lap-shoulder belt has a
If children open a door, they could special seat belt retractor for secure fas-
injure other persons tening of child restraints. The use of infant or child restraints is re-
get out of the car and injure themselves To fasten a child restraint follow child re- quired by law in all 50 states, the District of
or be injured by following traffic straint instructions for mounting. Then pull Columbia, the U.S. territories, and all
the shoulder belt out completely and let it Canadian provinces.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment unless they are retract. During seat belt retraction, a ratch- Infants and small children should be
firmly secured in place. eting sound can be heard to indicate that seated in an appropriate infant or child
For more information, please refer to the the special seat belt retractor is activated. restraint system which is properly secured
Useful features section ( page 238) The seat belt is now locked. Push down on by a lap-shoulder belt and that complies
through ( page 243). child restraint to take up any slack. with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo To deactivate, release seat belt buckle Standards 213 and 225 and Canadian
increases a childs risk of injury in the event and let seat belt retract completely. The Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and
of seat belt can again be used in the usual 210.2.
manner. A statement by the child restraint manu-
strong braking maneuvers
facturer of compliance with this standard
sudden changes of direction
can be found on the instruction label on
an accident the restraint and in the instruction manual
provided with the restraint.

85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

When using any infant restraint, toddler


Occupants, especially children, should nev- A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
restraint, or booster seat, be sure to care- the passenger seat will be seriously in-
er place their bodies or lean their heads in
fully read and follow all manufacturers in- jured or even killed if the passenger
the area of the door where the head-thorax
structions for installation and use. front air bag inflates in a collision which
air bag inflates. This could result in serious
Please read and observe warning labels injuries or death should the head-thorax air could occur under some circumstances,
even with the air bag technology in-
affixed to inside of the vehicle and to infant bag be deployed. Always sit as upright as
stalled in your vehicle.
or child restraints. possible, properly use the seat belts and an
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler If you install a rear-facing child restraint
on the passenger seat, make sure that
Warning! G restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the size and weight of the child.
the 5/ indicator lamp is illumi-
nated, indicating that the passenger
Children 12 years old and under must be Children can be killed or seriously injured by front air bag is deactivated. Should the
seated and properly secured in an appropri- an inflating air bag. Note the following 5/ indicator lamp not illuminate
ate infant or child restraint recommended important information when you place a or go out while the restraint is installed,
for the size and weight of the child. child in the passenger seat: please check installation. Periodically
check the 5/ indicator lamp
The infant or child restraint must be properly Your vehicle is equipped with air bag while driving to make sure the
secured with the vehicles seat belt fully in technology designed to turn off the pas- 5/ indicator lamp is illuminated.
accordance with the child seat manufactur- senger front air bag in your vehicle when If the 5/ indicator lamp goes out
ers instructions. the OCS senses the weight of a typical or remains out, do not transport a child
12-month-old child or less along with on the passenger seat until the system
the weight of a standard appropriate has been repaired. A child in a rear-fac-
child restraint on the passenger seat. ing child restraint on the passenger seat
will be seriously injured or even killed if
the passenger front air bag inflates.

86
Safety and Security
Occupant safety

If you place a child in a forward-facing


child restraint on the passenger seat,
Warning! G Warning! G
move the seat as far back as possible,
Infants and small children should never Children too big for a toddler restraint must
use the proper child restraint recom-
mended for the age, size and weight of share a seat belt with another occupant. ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
the child, and secure child restraint with During an accident, they could be crushed tion the shoulder belt across chest and
the vehicles seat belt according to the between the occupant and seat belt. shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seat
child seat manufacturers instructions. A childs risk of serious or fatal injuries is may be necessary to achieve proper seat
For children larger than the typical significantly increased if the child restraints belt positioning for children over 41 lbs until
12-month-old child, the passenger front they reach a height where a lap/shoulder
are not properly secured in the vehicle
air bag may or may not be activated belt fits properly without a booster.
and/or the child is not properly secured in
( page 74).
the child restraint. When the child restraint is not in use,
remove it from the vehicle or secure it with
the seat belt to prevent the child restraint
from becoming a projectile in the event of
an accident.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system. A childs
unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious
personal injury.

87
Safety and Security
Panic alarm

i USA only: Activating


This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following two Press and hold button 1 for at
conditions: least 1 second.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- An audible alarm and flashing exterior
ence, and
lamps will operate briefly.
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may Deactivating
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device Press button 1 again.
1 button could void the users authority to operate the
equipment. or
Insert the SmartKey or the SmartKey
i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry with KEYLESS-GO* in starter switch.
Canada. Operation is subject to the following or
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever.
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
cause undesired operation of the device. be in the vehicle.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the users authority to operate the
equipment.

88
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems
Driving safety systems
In this section you will find information on ABS
the following driving safety systems: Warning! G
ABS (Antilock Brake System) The following factors increase the risk of ac- Warning! G
BAS (Brake Assist System) cidents:
Excessive speed, especially in turns Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm,
ESP (Electronic Stability Program)
steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump-
Electro-hydraulic brake system Wet and slippery road surfaces
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of
Following another vehicle too closely the ABS and significantly reduces braking
The driving systems described in this sec- effectiveness.
tion cannot reduce these risks or prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the vehicle. the brake pressure so that the wheels do
Always adjust your driving style to the not lock during braking. This allows you to
prevailing road and weather conditions and maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
keep a safe distance to other road users and The ABS is functional above a speed of
objects on the street. approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) indepen-
dent of road surface conditions.
i In winter operation, the maximum effective- On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will re-

ness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP , and the
spond even to light brake pressure.
electro-hydraulic brake system is only achieved
with winter tires ( page 327) or snow chains as
required.

89
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

The - indicator lamp in the instrument The ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashes
cluster comes on when you switch on the whenever the ABS is activated which can Warning! G
ignition. It goes out when the engine is run- be an indication of hazardous road condi-
ning. tions and functions as a reminder to take The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
extra care while driving. physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
Braking it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
Emergency brake maneuver yond that afforded by the condition of the
If the ABS activates during braking, the vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the Keep continuous, full pressure on the afforded. The ABS cannot prevent acci-
instrument cluster dial flashes. Because brake pedal. dents, including those resulting from exces-
of the electro-hydraulic brake system, you sive speed in turns, following another
will not feel any pulsation in the brake
pedal.
Warning! G vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can pre-
Keep firm and steady pressure on the When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS vent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS
brake pedal. and the ESP are also switched off. equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels a reckless or dangerous manner which
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
may lock during hard braking, reducing could jeopardize the users safety or the
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
steering capability and extending the brak- safety of others.
namely braking power and the ability to
steer the vehicle. ing distance.
For more information, see the
Practical hints section ( page 342).

90
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

BAS ESP
Warning! G
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is
emergency situations. If you apply the BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of operational as soon as the engine is run-
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can ning and monitors the vehicles traction
provides full brake boost, thereby poten- it increase braking efficiency beyond that af- (force of adhesive friction between the
tially reducing the braking distance. forded by the condition of the vehicle brakes tires and the road surface) and handling.
and tires or the traction afforded. The BAS
Apply continuous full braking pressure The ESP recognizes when a wheel is
cannot prevent accidents, including those
until the emergency braking situation is spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
over. applying brakes to the appropriate wheel
lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
The ABS will prevent the wheels from and by limiting engine output, the ESP
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
locking. works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP is
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili-
especially useful while driving off and on
When you release the brake pedal, the ties of a BAS equipped vehicle must never
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP
brakes function again as normal. The BAS be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
also stabilizes the vehicle during braking
is then deactivated. manner which could jeopardize the users
and steering maneuvers.
safety or the safety of others.
The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
Warning! G instrument cluster ( page 26) flashes
when the ESP is engaged.
If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake
system is still functioning normally, but with- The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the
out the additional brake boost available that instrument cluster comes on when you
BAS would normally provide in an emer- switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
gency braking maneuver. Therefore, the engine is running.
braking distance may increase.

91
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

! Because the ESP operates automatically,


Warning! G Warning! G the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter
switch position 0 or 1or KEYLESS-GO*
Never switch off the ESP when you see the The ESP cannot prevent the natural laws of start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when
ABS/ESP warning lamp v flashing in physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can the parking brake is being tested on a brake
the instrument cluster. In this case proceed it increase the traction afforded. The ESP test dynamometer
as follows: cannot prevent accidents, including those the vehicle is being towed with the front axle
While driving off, apply as little throttle resulting from excessive speed in turns, or raised
as possible. hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and Active braking action through the ESP may
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
While driving, ease up on the accelera-
capabilities of an ESP equipped vehicle
tor. The ESP will only function properly if you use
must never be exploited in a reckless or wheels of the recommended tire size
Adapt your speed and driving style to dangerous manner which could jeopardize ( page 449).
the prevailing road conditions.
the users safety or the safety of others.
Failure to observe these guidelines could i The cruise control and the Distronic*
cause the vehicle to skid. system deactivate automatically when the ESP
is in operation ( page 225).
The ESP cannot prevent accidents result-
ing from excessive speed. For more information, see the
Practical hints section ( page 342) and
( page 367).

92
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Electronic traction system Switching off the ESP


The electronic traction system is a compo-
Warning! G
nent of ESP. Warning! G Switch on the ESP immediately if the afore-
The electronic traction system improves mentioned circumstances do not apply any-
ESP should not be switched off during nor-
the vehicles ability to utilize available trac- more. Otherwise the ESP will not stabilize
mal driving other than in the circumstances
tion, especially under slippery road condi- the vehicle when it is starting to skid or a
described below. Disabling of the system
tions by applying the brakes to a spinning wheel is spinning.
will reduce vehicle stability in standard driv-
wheel.
ing maneuvers.
When you switch off the ESP, the elec- When you switch off the ESP
Do not switch off the ESP when a spare
tronic traction system is still enabled. the ESP does not stabilize the vehicle
wheel is mounted.
the engine output is not limited, which
Warning! G To improve the vehicles traction, switch allows the drive wheels to spin and
off the ESP in driving situations where it thus cut into surfaces for better grip
If you are driving too fast, the electronic
would be advantageous to have the drive the electronic traction system will still
traction system cannot reduce the risk of an
wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for apply the brakes to a spinning wheel
accident.
better grip such as:
The electronic traction system cannot pre- the ESP continues to operate when
when driving with snow chains
vent the natural laws of physics from acting you are braking
on the vehicle. in deep snow you cannot activate the cruise control
in sand or gravel or the Distronic* system
the cruise control or the Distronic*
system switch off if currently activated

93
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

i When the ESP is switched off and one or Electro-hydraulic brake system
more drive wheels are spinning, the ABS/ESP Warning! G
warning lamp v in the speedometer flashes. The electro-hydraulic brake system com-
However, the ESP will then not stabilize the When the ABS/ESP warning lamp v is bines a hydraulic brake circuit with elec-
vehicle. illuminated continuously, the ESP is tronically controlled brake servo
The switch is located in the lower part of switched off or is not operational due to a assistance. You have increased braking
the center console. malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard safety and improved braking comfort.
driving maneuvers reduces.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail- Warning! G
ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP. Never ignore a brake malfunction indicated
in the speedometer display, for example by
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an the ; (USA only) or 3 (Canada only)
extended period with the ESP switched off. This warning lamp. Refer to the Practical hints
may cause serious damage to the drivetrain section ( page 345). Also read and ob-
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz serve the messages in the instrument clus-
Limited Warranty. ter multifunction display ( page 377).
1 ESP switch
Switching on the ESP
Press ESP switch 1 until the
ABS/ESP warning lamp v in the Press ESP switch 1.
instrument cluster comes on. The ABS/ESP warning lamp v in
The ESP is switched off. the instrument cluster goes out.
You are now again in normal driving
mode with the ESP switched on.

94
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

The electro-hydraulic brake system is auto-


Warning! G If there is a malfunction in the
electro-hydraulic brake system, we recom-
matically activated when you
mend that the vehicle be transported with unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
The electro-hydraulic brake system requires
electrical power to operate. all wheels off the ground using flatbed or ap- or with KEYLESS-GO*
propriate wheel lift/dolly equipment.
A malfunction in the vehicles power supply open the drivers or passenger door
or electrical system may impair brake sys- A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
tem operation and switch it into its emer- not permit the use of the recommended
to position 1
gency operation mode. In such a case, the towing methods and the vehicle requires
towing with all four wheels on the ground. in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*, press
red brake warning lamp ( page 345)
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on the start/stop button on the gear se-
comes on and warning messages
the ground is only permissible for distances lector lever once
( page 377) appear in the multifunction
display while driving. To brake, the driver up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to depress the brake pedal
must then apply significantly greater brake exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more infor-
mation, see Towing the vehicle release the parking brake
pedal pressure and depress the pedal much
further to obtain the expected braking ef- ( page 434).
fect. If necessary, apply full pressure to the
brake pedal. Brakes are only applied to the
front wheels. Stopping distance is in-
creased!

95
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

i If the electro-hydraulic brake system is acti- The electro-hydraulic brake system


vated as the brake pedal is first depressed, you Warning! G switches off automatically
may feel a reduced pedal resistance and longer
approximately 2 minutes after you
pedal travel than normal. When releasing the Have brake pad replacement and other work
pedal, you may also feel the brake pedal pulsate on the electro-hydraulic brake system turned the SmartKey in the starter
and you may hear a sound which is caused by the carried out by qualified technicians only. switch to position 0 or removed the
activation of the electro-hydraulic brake system Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz SmartKey
pump. This is normal and not an indication of a
malfunction. Pedal travel returns to normal when
Center for further information. approximately 2 minutes after you
you release the brake pedal and the sound soon The electro-hydraulic brake system must be pressed the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
ceases. deactivated prior to working on the system. button to turn off the engine or power
If you experience the above while driving and the High pressure is intermittently built up in the supply and opened the drivers door
red brake warning lamp ( page 345) illumi- system as part of its automatic self-test. (with drivers door open, the starter
nates and/or warning messages appear in the In addition, the system is automatically acti- switch is set to position 0, same as
multifunction display ( page 377), the brake vated when the vehicle is unlocked by re- SmartKey removed from starter
system is malfunctioning. Follow the instructions mote control, when the driver or passenger switch)
of the warning message(s) and have the brake door is opened, when the SmartKey in the
system checked immediately. approximately 20 seconds after you
starter switch is turned to position 1 or the
locked the vehicle from outside
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button is pressed
once, when the brake pedal is depressed or
when the parking brake is released. Failure
to deactivate the system prior to mainte-
nance will cause brake pistons to extend
and brake fluid to leak, which may result in
injuries (contusions and acid burns). Extend-
ed brake pistons may also cause injury.

96
Safety and Security
Driving safety systems

Notes on driving with the On long and steep grades, shift to a


electro-hydraulic brake system lower gear (gear range 1, 2, or 3) to
prevent the brakes from overheating
Following extended periods of only
and to reduce brake wear.
minor loads to your brake system, you
should occasionally apply the brakes After hard braking, it is advisable to
when traveling at high speeds. This drive on for some time so that the air
improves the grip of the brake pads. stream will cool down the brakes
faster.
After driving on wet or snow-covered
roads, you should apply your brakes Only Mercedes-Benz approved compo-
firmly before parking your vehicle. nents (e.g. brake pads) should be in-
This produces heat which serves to stalled on your vehicle. Brake pads
dry the brake disks and help prevent not approved by Mercedes-Benz may
corrosion. impair the safety of your vehicle.

Warning! G
Be very careful not to endanger other road
users when you apply the brakes.

97
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Immobilizer Deactivating Anti-theft alarm system

The immobilizer prevents unauthorized With the SmartKey Once the alarm system has been armed, a
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
someone opens
When leaving the vehicle, always take the to position 2 ( page 40).
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* a door
with you and lock the vehicle. The engine With KEYLESS-GO* the trunk lid
can be started by anyone with a valid
Switch on the ignition ( page 41). the hood
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
that is left inside the vehicle. i Starting the engine will also deactivate the a storage compartment in the rear
immobilizer.
the glove box
Activating In case the engine cannot be started (yet the
vehicles battery is charged), the system is not the storage compartment under the
With the SmartKey operational. Contact an authorized armrest
Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Remove the SmartKey from the starter 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
switch. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada). ing element (a door, for example) is imme-
diately closed.
With KEYLESS-GO*
Press the start/stop button on the gear
selector lever once.
The engine is turned off.
Open the drivers door.

98
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

The alarm system will also be triggered Arming the alarm system i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
when The alarm system indicator lamp is located times and no acoustic warning sounds three
times, a door or the trunk lid may not be properly
someone attempts to raise the vehicle in the locking switch in the upper part of closed.
the center console.
unlocking and opening the drivers Close the respective element and lock the
door, the trunk, or the glove box with vehicle again.
the mechanical key
someone opens a door from the inside Disarming the alarm system
Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey
someone opens the trunk lid with the
emergency release button or KEYLESS-GO*.
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
i If the alarm stays on for more than acoustic warning sounds once to
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is ini-
tiated automatically by the Tele Aid system indicate that the alarm system is
( page 252) provided Tele Aid service was sub- disarmed.
scribed to and properly activated, and that nec- 1 Alarm system indicator lamp
Alarm system indicator lamp 1 goes
essary cellular service and GPS coverage are Lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or
available. out.
KEYLESS-GO*.
i The alarm system will rearm automatically
The turn signal lamps flash three times again after approximately 40 seconds if no door
and an acoustic warning sounds three was opened.
times to indicate that the alarm system
is armed.
Alarm system indicator lamp 1 starts
flashing.

99
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Canceling the alarm Tow-away alarm Arming tow-away alarm


To cancel the alarm: Lock your vehicle with the SmartKey or
Once the tow-away alarm is armed, a visual
KEYLESS-GO*
and audible alarm will be triggered when
With the SmartKey
someone attempts to raise the vehicle. The tow-away alarm is automatically
Insert the SmartKey in the starter armed after about 30 seconds.
switch. i If the alarm stays on for more than
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is i When you unlock your vehicle, the tow-away
or initiated automatically by the Tele Aid system protection disarms automatically. The tow-away
( page 252) provided Tele Aid service was alarm remains disarmed until you lock the
Press the or button on the subscribed to and properly activated, and that vehicle again.
SmartKey. necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available. Disarming tow-away alarm
With KEYLESS-GO*
To prevent triggering the tow-away alarm,
Grasp an outside door handle. disable the tow-away alarm feature before
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must towing the vehicle, or when parking on a
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. surface subject to movement, such as a
ferry or auto train.
or
The button is located on the center
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but-
console between the drivers seat and the
ton ( page 41).
passenger seat.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.

100
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems

Press button 1. With KEYLESS-GO*


The indicator lamp 2 in the switch Grasp an outside door handle.
comes on briefly.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
Exit and lock your vehicle with the be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
SmartKey or (vehicles with or
KEYLESS-GO*) with the lock button on
a door handle. Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button ( page 41).
The tow-away alarm remains disarmed un-
til you lock the vehicle again. The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
1 Tow-away alarm off button be inside the vehicle.
2 Indicator lamp Canceling the alarm
Switch off the ignition and remove the To cancel the alarm:
SmartKey from the starter switch.
With the SmartKey
i You cannot disarm the tow-away alarm
when the ignition is switched on. Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
Press the or button on the
SmartKey.

101
102
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Good visibility
Automatic climate control
Power windows
Retractable hardtop
Driving systems
Useful features

103
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

In the Controls in detail section you will SmartKey


find detailed information on how to oper-
ate the equipment installed on your vehi- Your vehicle comes supplied with two
cle. If you are already familiar with the SmartKeys, each with remote control and
basic functions of your vehicle, this section a removable mechanical key.
will be of particular interest to you. The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba- ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
Getting started section of this manual. you are in close proximity to it.
The corresponding page numbers are giv- The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
en at the beginning of each segment. SmartKey with remote control
the doors 1 Lock button
For more information on locking and un-
the trunk lid 2 Opening button for trunk
locking, see the Getting started section
( page 114)
( page 38). the glove box 3 Mechanical key locking tab
the storage compartment under the 4 Unlock button
armrest 5 Battery check lamp
6 Panic button ( page 88)
the storage compartment in the rear
the fuel filler flap

104
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i USA only: ! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle


Warning! G This device complies with Part 15 of the with the SmartKey, then the batteries in the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following SmartKey are discharged, the SmartKey is mal-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the two conditions: functioning or the vehicle battery is drained.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it (1) This device may not cause harmful Check the batteries in the SmartKey
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave interference, and ( page 113) and replace them if necessary
children unattended in the vehicle, or with (2) this device must accept any interference ( page 407).
access to an unlocked vehicle. A childs received, including interference that may Use the mechanical key to unlock the
unsupervised access to a vehicle could cause undesired operation. drivers door ( page 403) and the trunk
result in an accident and/or serious Any unauthorized modification to this device ( page 404).
personal injury. could void the users authority to operate the Have the vehicle batteries and their
equipment. connections checked ( page 427).
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid ex- Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
i Canada only: doors ( page 405).
posing the SmartKey to high levels of electro- This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
magnetic radiation. Canada. Operation is subject to the following If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
two conditions: Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the users authority to operate the
equipment.

i You can also open and close the power win-


dows ( page 201) and the retractable hardtop
using the SmartKey ( page 206).

105
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Factory setting Global unlocking Global locking


i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with Press button . Press button .
the SmartKey, an acoustic signal sounds. The
All turn signal lamps flash once. With the trunk and both doors closed:
signal is activated at the factory. If you wish to
deactivate the feature or adjust its signal An acoustic warning sounds once. All turn signal lamps flash three
volume, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz times.
Center. The locking knobs in the doors
move up. An acoustic warning sounds three
times.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed. The locking knobs in the doors
The vehicle will lock again automatically move down.
and rearm the alarm system within approx- The anti-theft alarm system is
imately 40 seconds of unlocking if: armed.
neither door nor trunk is opened
the SmartKey is not inserted in the
starter switch
the central locking switch is not
activated

106
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Selective setting Unlocking drivers door and fuel filler Global locking
flap
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Press button .
to reprogram the SmartKey so that press- Press button once.
With all doors and the trunk closed:
ing button only unlocks the drivers
All turn signal lamps flash once.
door, interior lockable storage compart- All turn signal lamps flash three
ments and the fuel filler flap. An acoustic warning sounds once. times.
Press and hold buttons and The locking knob in the drivers An acoustic warning sounds three
simultaneously for about 5 seconds door moves up. times.
until battery check lamp 5 flashes The anti-theft alarm system is The locking knobs in the doors
twice. disarmed. move down.
The SmartKey will then function as The anti-theft alarm system is
follows: Global unlocking
armed.
Press button twice.
Restoring to factory setting
All turn signal lamps flash once.
Press and hold buttons and
An acoustic warning sounds once.
simultaneously for about 5 seconds
The locking knobs in the doors until battery check lamp 5
move up. ( page 104) flashes twice.
The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.

107
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*


Warning! G
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, When leaving the vehicle, always take the
each with remote controls and a remov- SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
able mechanical key. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
The function of the SmartKey overrules the
an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised
KEYLESS-GO function.
access to a vehicle could result in an
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated accident and/or serious personal injury.
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
is checked every time you grasp a door
1 Lock button ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
2 Opening button for trunk exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to
handle. high levels of electromagnetic radiation.
( page 114)
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, 3 Mechanical key locking tab
i USA only:
your vehicle unlocks 4 Unlock button This device complies with Part 15 of the
the doors 5 Battery check lamp FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
6 Panic button ( page 88) two conditions:
the trunk lid
For information on using the SmartKey (1) This device may not cause harmful
the glove box buttons, see SmartKey ( page 104). interference, and

the storage compartment under the (2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
armrest
cause undesired operation.
the storage compartments in the rear Any unauthorized modification to this device
the fuel filler flap could void the users authority to operate the
equipment.

108
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i Canada only: ! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, then the
You can also use the SmartKey with
Canada. Operation is subject to the following batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the
two conditions: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
the vehicle battery is drained. ( page 104).
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
Check the batteries in the SmartKey with You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may KEYLESS-GO ( page 113) and replace tions with normal SmartKey functions
cause undesired operation of the device. them if necessary ( page 407). (e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and
Use the mechanical key to unlock the locking with the button).
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the users authority to operate the drivers door ( page 403) and the
trunk ( page 404). Always carry the SmartKey with
equipment. KEYLESS-GO with you.
Have the vehicle batteries and their
i You can also close the power windows connections checked ( page 427). Never store the SmartKey with
( page 201) and the retractable hardtop using KEYLESS-GO together with:
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO ( page 206).
doors ( page 405). Electronic items such as a cellular
i When you unlock the vehicle, the If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunc- phone or another SmartKey with
electro-hydraulic brake system is activated. tioning, contact Roadside Assistance or an KEYLESS-GO
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil
Doing so could impair the function of
the KEYLESS-GO system.

109
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

To lock or unlock the vehicle, the This does not apply if, after starting, the Find the SmartKey or change its
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be selector lever is still in position P and present location immediately (e.g.
located outside the vehicle within ap- the SmartKey is then inserted in the place it on the passenger seat or insert
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the starter switch. The SmartKey will then it in shirt pocket).
trunk. have priority over the KEYLESS-GO
Remember that the engine can be
function and the vehicles electrical
If the vehicle has been parked for more started by anyone with a SmartKey
system will operate according to the
than 72 hours, you must pull an outside with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
position of the SmartKey in the starter
door handle in order to activate the vehicle. If you leave the SmartKey with
switch, even stopping the engine.
KEYLESS-GO function. KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is locking the vehicle, the message Key
In order to start the engine with the
positioned farther away from the vehi- Detected In Vehicle will appear in the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
cle, the system may no longer recog- multifunction display.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
must be located in the vehicle. The vehicle then cannot be locked or
All doors must be closed. the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
The brake pedal must be firmly
depressed. Do not depress the If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re-
accelerator. moved from the vehicle while the en-
gine is running (e.g. if passenger exits
If you have started the engine with the the vehicle with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button KEYLESS-GO), the message Key Not
( page 41), you can only turn it off Detected will appear in the multifunc-
again with this button, even if you have tion display while driving off.
put the SmartKey in the starter switch
in the meantime.

110
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Factory setting Global unlocking Global locking


i When unlocking or locking the vehicle with Grasp an outside door handle. Press lock button on an outside door
KEYLESS-GO, an acoustic signal sounds. The sig- handle ( page 66).
All turn signal lamps flash once.
nal is activated at the factory. If you wish to de-
With the trunk and both doors closed:
activate the feature or adjust its signal volume, An acoustic warning sounds once.
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. All turn signal lamps flash three
The locking knobs in the doors
times.
move up.
An acoustic warning sounds three
The anti-theft alarm system is
times.
disarmed.
The locking knobs in the doors
The vehicle will lock again automatically
and rearm the alarm system within approx- move down.
imately 40 seconds of unlocking if neither The anti-theft alarm system is
a door nor the trunk is opened. armed.
i The vehicle could inadvertently unlock if the i Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft (1 m) system*: You can also lock the vehicle using the
of the vehicle and the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
an outside door handle is splashed with ( page 119).
water
or
you attempt to clean an outside door handle

111
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Selective setting Unlocking the drivers door and fuel fill- Global locking
er flap
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Press lock button on an outside door
to reprogram the SmartKey with Grasp the drivers door handle. handle.
KEYLESS-GO so that grasping an outside
All turn signal lamps flash once. With all doors and the trunk closed:
door handle only unlocks the drivers door,
interior lockable storage compartments An acoustic warning sounds once. All turn signal lamps flash three
and the fuel filler flap. times.
The locking knob in the drivers
Press and hold buttons and door moves up. An acoustic warning sounds three
simultaneously for about 5 seconds times.
The anti-theft alarm system is
until battery check lamp 5 disarmed. The locking knobs in the doors
( page 108) flashes twice. move down.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will Global unlocking
The anti-theft alarm system is
then function as follows: Grasp the door handle on the passen- armed.
ger side.
i Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
All turn signal lamps flash once. system*: You can also lock the vehicle using
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch
An acoustic warning sounds once. ( page 119).
The locking knobs in the doors
move up. Restoring to factory setting
The anti-theft alarm system is Press and hold buttons and
disarmed. simultaneously for about 5 seconds
until battery check lamp 5
( page 108) flashes twice.

112
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Checking the batteries in the SmartKey Loss of the SmartKey or SmartKey with Opening the doors from the inside
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* KEYLESS-GO*
You can open a locked door from the in-
Press button or . If you lose your SmartKey or SmartKey side. Open door only when conditions are
with KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key, safe to do so.
The battery check lamp ( page 104)
you should do the following:
or ( page 108) comes on briefly to in-
dicate that the SmartKey or SmartKey Have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
with KEYLESS-GO batteries are in KEYLESS-GO deactivated by an
order. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If the battery check lamp does not come Report the loss of the SmartKey or
on briefly during check, then the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries are mechanical key to your car insurance
discharged. company immediately.
Replace the batteries ( page 407).
Have the mechanical lock replaced if
You can obtain the required batteries at any necessary. 1 Locking knob
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. 2 Inside door handle
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
i If the batteries are checked within signal be glad to supply you with a replacement. Pull on inside door handle 2 in direc-
range of the vehicle, pressing the or tion of arrow.
button will lock or unlock the vehicle
accordingly. If the door was locked, locking knob 1
will move up.
Opening a door causes its window to
open slightly. It will fully close when the
door is shut.

113
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

! A side window will not work if it is blocked i If the vehicle has previously been locked Opening the trunk
with ice or if the battery needs charging. If you with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, opening a
cannot shut a door, do not force it or you could door from the inside will trigger the anti-theft You can open the trunk if the vehicle is sta-
damage the door or the side window. alarm system. tionary and the retractable hardtop is fully
Fix whatever is affecting the window before To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: opened or closed.
trying to shut the door.
Press button or on the
i If you hear a warning signal, you have forgot- SmartKey. Warning! G
ten to switch off the low beam headlamps or the Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
parking lamps before opening the drivers door.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the trunk is closed when the
In addition, the message Lights Are Still engine is running and while driving.
On appears in the multifunction display. Grasp an outside door handle.
Among other dangers, deadly carbon
Switch off the low beam headlamps or the park- The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
ing lamps. within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
interior resulting in unconsciousness and
If the message Switch off lights or Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button death.
remove key. appears in the multifunction ( page 41).
display, remove the SmartKey from the starter The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must be
switch or switch off the automatic headlamp inside the vehicle.
A minimum height clearance of
mode. 6.2 ft (1.88 m) is required to open the
trunk lid.
! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps when
leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged i If the trunk lid does not open, the trunk lid is
battery. still locked separately ( page 120).

114
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i To facilitate trunk loading and unloading Opening the trunk from the outside Vehicles with trunk opening/closing
when the hardtop is retracted, you can raise the system*
hardtop from its storage position in the trunk
Press and hold button on the
using the load assist feature ( page 245). You
may also unhook the luggage cover. SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* until trunk unlocks and
Remember to re-secure the luggage cover after
loading/unloading the trunk. Otherwise you will begins to open.
not be able to lower the retractable hardtop. or
Pull on handle 1.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
1 Trunk lid handle
! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat-
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing ically. Always make sure that there is sufficient
system* overhead clearance.

Press button on the SmartKey or ! To stop the opening procedure, press


SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. button on the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* or pull the trunk lid handle.
or
Pull on handle 1.
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: The
vehicle must be unlocked.
Lift the trunk lid.

115
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Opening the trunk from the inside Vehicles with trunk opening/closing Closing the trunk
system*
Vehicles without trunk opening/closing
system* Warning! G
Make sure the trunk is closed when the
engine is running and while driving.
Among other dangers, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle
interior resulting in unconsciousness and
death.

1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch i When the hardtop is retracted, it must be


2 Indicator lamp completely lowered in the trunk before the trunk
1 Remote trunk opening switch can be closed ( page 204).
Pull and hold switch 1 until the trunk
2 Indicator lamp
unlocks and begins to open. i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
Pull switch 1 until the trunk begins to trunk. You may lock yourself out.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on and re-
open.
mains lit until the is trunk closed again. i If the vehicle was previously centrally
The trunk lid unlocks. Indicator locked, the trunk will lock automatically after
Release switch 1.
lamp 2 comes on and remains lit until closing it. All turn signal lamps flash three times
the trunk is closed again. ! The trunk lid swings open upwards automat- and an acoustic signal sounds three times to
ically. Always make sure that there is sufficient confirm locking.
Lift the trunk lid. overhead clearance.
To interrupt the opening procedure:
Press or pull switch 1.

116
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a possi- Close trunk lid with hands placed flat Closing the trunk from the inside
ble inadvertent lockout, the trunk will open auto- on trunk lid. automatically*
matically if a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
recognized inside the vehicle or in the trunk. The power closing assist automatically
The vehicle is only locked when the turn signals ensures that the lid is pulled closed Warning! G
flash three times and an acoustic signal sounds completely ( page 121).
three times. If you are carrying a second Maintain sight of trunk area while operating
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you, you can
still lock the vehicle.
Warning! G door mounted switch. Monitor the closing
procedure carefully to make sure no one is
in danger of being injured.
Closing the trunk from the outside To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk To interrupt the closing procedure, release
manually
lid opening when closing the trunk. Be espe- the door mounted remote trunk open-
cially careful when small children are ing/closing* switch again.
around. Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and removed from the vehicle, the remote trunk
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children opening/closing* switch can be operated.
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to Therefore, do not leave children unattended
an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
access to a vehicle could result in an vehicle. A childs unsupervised access to a
1 Handle accident and/or serious personal injury. vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Lower trunk lid by pulling firmly on
handle 1.

117
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i If the trunk lid comes into contact with an Press and hold switch 1 until the Closing the trunk from the outside
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has been trunk is closed. automatically*
piled too high) in the upper motion sequence, the
closing procedure is stopped and the trunk re- Indicator lamp 2 in the switch goes
opens slightly. out when the trunk is closed. Warning! G
In vehicles with trunk opening/closing To interrupt the closing procedure:
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
system* you can close the trunk from Release switch 1. make sure no one is in danger of being in-
the inside using the remote trunk jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
opening/ closing* switch. always keep hands and fingers away from
the trunk lid opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
are around. To stop the closing procedure,
do one of the following:
Press button on the SmartKey or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
Press the trunk opening/closing*
switch (on the drivers door).
Press trunk closing switch.
1 Remote trunk opening/closing* switch Press the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
(vehicles with trunk opening/closing switch*.
system*) Pull the trunk lid handle.
2 Indicator lamp

118
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Closing trunk and locking vehicle from


Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
outside (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*)
KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter
switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* In vehicles with trunk opening/closing sys-
removed from the vehicle, the trunk tem* and KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the
opening/closing* switch can be operated. trunk and lock the vehicle simultaneously
Therefore, do not leave children unattended from the outside using the KEYLESS-GO
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked locking/closing switch.
vehicle. A childs unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*

In vehicles with trunk opening/closing


system* you can close the trunk sepa-
rately from the outside using the trunk
closing switch.

1 KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*


1 Trunk closing switch
Press trunk closing switch 1 briefly.
The trunk closes.

119
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Make sure you have the SmartKey with Valet locking Close the trunk ( page 116).
KEYLESS-GO with you.
Pull the mechanical key out of the
Press switch 1 briefly. i To deny any unauthorized person access to SmartKey ( page 403).
the trunk, e.g. when you valet park the vehicle,
With all doors and the trunk closed: lock it separately with the mechanical key. Leave Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
only the SmartKey or SmartKey with lid lock.
The locking knobs in the doors KEYLESS-GO* less its mechanical key with the
move down. vehicle. Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical
The trunk starts to close automati- The lock is located next to the handle key in that position to lock the trunk.
cally. above the rear license plate recess.
The trunk remains locked even when the
All turn signal lamps flash three
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
times once the trunk has closed
completely. i You can only cancel the separate trunk
locking mode by means of the mechanical key.
An acoustic warning sounds three
times once the trunk has closed Insert the mechanical key in the trunk
completely. lid lock.
The anti-theft alarm system is Turn the mechanical key counterclock-
armed. wise to neutral position 1 and remove
the mechanical key in that position to
1 Neutral position unlock the trunk.
2 Locked You can now open the trunk
( page 114).

120
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Trunk lid emergency release i The emergency release button unlocks the Power closing assist for trunk lid
trunk while the vehicle is standing still or in
With the emergency release button, the motion. It is not necessary to slam the trunk lid
trunk can be opened from inside the trunk. closed. An electrical power-assisted
Illumination of the emergency release
mechanism draws the trunk lid closed
The emergency release button is located button:
on the left side of the trunk. quietly and automatically once the trunk
The button flashes for 30 minutes after lid has been latched. When the electrical
opening the trunk. power-assisted mechanism has stopped,
The button flashes for 60 minutes after the trunk can be re-opened.
closing the trunk.
i The emergency release button does not un- Warning! G
lock the trunk if the vehicle battery is discharged
or disconnected. To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
lid opening when closing the trunk.
Be especially careful when small children
1 Emergency release button are around.

Briefly press emergency release In case of danger, pull the inside or outside
button 1. door handle, or press the trunk lid lock.

The trunk lid unlocks and opens To prevent personal injury, never actuate
slightly. the closing assist mechanism by tampering
with the door or trunk lid latch.
Push up the trunk lid to fully open.

121
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

Power closing assist for trunk lid Automatic central locking Locking and unlocking from the inside
Press the trunk lid gently into its lock.
The doors and the trunk lid lock automati-
The trunk closes automatically. cally when the vehicle is set into motion. Warning! G
i You can open a locked door from the inside.
Warning! G Open door only when conditions are safe to do
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
so.
Make sure the trunk is closed when the from the starter switch, take it with you, and
engine is running and while driving. i The doors unlock automatically after an lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
accident if the force of the impact exceeds a unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
Among other dangers, deadly carbon preset threshold.
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised
The vehicle locks automatically when the access to a vehicle could result in an
interior resulting in unconsciousness and
ignition is switched on and the wheels are accident and/or serious personal injury.
death. turning at vehicle speeds of approximately
9 mph (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore
lock yourself out when the vehicle You can lock or unlock the vehicle from
is pushed inside using the central locking switches.
This can be useful, for example, if you want
is on a test stand
to unlock the passenger door from the
You can deactivate the automatic locking inside or want to lock the vehicle before
using the control system ( page 166). starting to drive.
The central locking switches do not lock or
unlock the fuel filler flap or the interior
storage compartments, such as the glove
box.

122
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking

i You can open a locked door from inside at


any time. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO*, it will
not unlock using the central locking switch.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch
and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is set to factory settings, the
1 Central locking switch complete vehicle is unlocked when a door is
2 Central unlocking switch opened from the inside
and the SmartKey or SmartKey with
Locking KEYLESS-GO* is set to selective settings,
only the door opened from the inside is
Press central locking switch 1. unlocked
If all the doors are closed, the vehicle
locks.

Unlocking
Press central unlocking switch 2.
The vehicle unlocks.

123
Controls in detail
Seats

For more information on seat adjustment, The switch is located on the top side of the Lumbar support
see Seat adjustment ( page 44). seat.
You can adjust the contour of the seats
Moving the seats forward and lumbar support to help enhance support to
backward your spine.

You can move the seats forward and back


to facilitate loading and unloading.

Warning! G
When moving the seats, be sure that no one
can be caught by them. Never place hands 1 Seat forward
under seat or near any moving parts during 2 Seat backward
a seat adjustment procedure. To stop the
seat from moving when potential danger Moving the seat forward 1 Thumbwheel
exists: Press switch at 1 and release. Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
Press the switch once more. Set the lumbar support
The seat moves forward automatically.
Move the seat adjustment switch on the between 0 and 5.
door ( page 43). Moving the seat backward
Press switch at 2 and release.
! When moving the seats, make sure that
there are no items in the footwell or behind the The seat moves backwards to its previ-
seats. Otherwise you could damage the seats. ous position automatically.

124
Controls in detail
Seats

Multicontour backrest* Switch on the ignition ( page 40). Massage function (PULSE)
You can reduce muscle tension during long
The multicontour backrest has inflatable Shoulder region support trips by periodically using the massage
air cushions built into the seat backrest
Press or on switch 2. function.
to provide additional lumbar and side
support. The air cushion inflates or deflates. Press button 4.
The seat backrest cushion height and The indicator lamp on button 4 comes
Lumbar region support
curvature can be continuously varied with on. The air cushions in the lumbar
switches on the lower left side (drivers Press k or j on rocker region inflate and deflate rhythmically.
seat) or the lower right side (passenger switch 1.
side) of the seat when the ignition is
i The massage function switches off automat-
This selects the air cushion you wish to ically after approximately 8 minutes. The indica-
switched on. adjust. tor lamp goes out.

Press or on rocker
switch 1.
The air cushion inflates or deflates.

Side bolsters adjustment


Press switch 3 to the right or left.
The lateral support increases or de-
creases.
1 Lumbar region support
2 Shoulder region support
3 Side bolsters adjustment
4 Massage function (PULSE)

125
Controls in detail
Seats

Seat heating Switching on rapid seat heating


Press upper switch position 2.
Vehicles without seat ventilation* Both red indicator lamps on the switch
The red indicator lamps on the switch come on.
indicate the selected heating level:
Switching off rapid seat heating
Level
Press upper switch position 2 once
2 Two red indicator lamps on more.
(rapid seat heating)
1 Normal heating i If one lamp or both lamps on the seat
The seat heating automatically 2 Rapid heating heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient
switches to level 1 after voltage available since too many electrical con-
approximately 5 minutes. Switch on the ignition ( page 40). sumers are turned on. The seat heating switches
off automatically.
1 One red indicator lamp on
Switching on seat heating The seat heating will switch back on again
(normal seat heating)
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
Press lower switch position 1.
The seat heating automatically available.
switches off after approximately A red indicator lamp on the switch
30 minutes. comes on.
off No indicator lamp on
Switching off seat heating
Press lower switch position 1 once
more.

126
Controls in detail
Seats

Vehicles with seat ventilation* Switching off seat heating


The red indicator lamps on the switch Press switch 1 repeatedly until all red
indicate the selected heating level: indicator lamps go out.

Level i If one or both of the lamps on the seat


heating switch are flashing, there is insufficient
2 Two red indicator lamps on voltage available since too many electrical con-
(rapid seat heating) sumers are turned on. The seat heating switches
off automatically.
The seat heating automatically
The seat heating will switch back on again
switches to level 1 after approxi-
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
mately 5 minutes. 1 Seat heating switch
available.
1 One red indicator lamp on Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
(normal seat heating)
Switching on seat heating
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately Press switch 1 repeatedly until the
30 minutes. desired heating level is set.
off No red indicator lamp on One or two red indicator lamps on the
switch show the selected heating level.

127
Controls in detail
Seats

Seat ventilation* Switching on seat ventilation


Press switch 1.
The blue indicator lamps on the switch
indicate the selected ventilation level: Three blue indicator lamps on the
switch come on.
Level
Continue pressing switch 1 until the
3 Three blue indicator lamps on desired seat ventilation level is
(highest level) reached.
2 Two blue indicator lamps on
Switching off seat ventilation
1 One blue indicator lamp on 1 Seat ventilation switch
(lowest level) Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). blue indicator lamps go out.
off No blue indicator lamp on
i If one or all of the lamps on the seat
ventilation switch are flashing, there is insuffi-
cient voltage available since too many electrical
consumers are turned on. The seat ventilation
switches off automatically.
The seat ventilation will switch back on again
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.

128
Controls in detail
Memory function
Memory function
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up Each stored position on the passenger side
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different configurations. includes the following settings:
seat position fore and aft, and seat back- Each stored position on the drivers side Seat position and lumbar support
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate includes the following settings:
control, reach and comfort. The head Multicontour seat*: previously saved
restraint should also be adjusted for Seat position and lumbar support setting
proper height. See also the section on Multicontour seat*: previously saved The memory switch is located on the door
air bags ( page 70) for proper seat setting control panel.
positioning.
Steering wheel position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to
ensure adequate control, reach, operation Exterior rear view mirrors position
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for Warning! G
adequate rear vision.
Do not activate the memory function while
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small
driving. Activating the memory function
children should be seated in an appropri-
while driving could cause the driver to lose
ate infant or child restraint system which is
control of the vehicle.
properly secured by a lap-shoulder belt
M Memory button
and that complies with U.S. Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standards 213 and 225 and 1, 2, 3 Stored positions
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
213 and 210.2.
or
Open the respective door.

129
Controls in detail
Memory function

Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory

Adjust the seats, steering wheel and On memory switch, press and hold
exterior rear view mirrors to the stored position button 1, 2 or 3 until
desired position ( page 43). the seat, steering wheel and exterior
rear view mirrors have fully moved to
Press memory button M.
the stored positions.
Release memory button and press a
stored position button 1, 2, or 3 within i Releasing the button immediately stops
movement to the stored positions.
3 seconds.
All the settings are stored at the
selected position.

130
Controls in detail
Lighting
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch 5 C Parking lamps (also side marker
headlamps and use the turn signals, see lamps, tail lamps, license plate
Switching on headlamps ( page 57) lamps, instrument panel lamps)
and Turn signals ( page 57).
6 B Low beam headlamps or high
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive beam headlamps.
on the other side of the road than the country in
which the vehicle is registered, you must have 7 Front fog lamps
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low 8 Rear fog lamp
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i If you hear a warning signal, you have forgot-
ten to switch off the low beam headlamps or the
Exterior lamp switch parking lamps before opening the drivers door.
In addition, the message Lights Are Still
1 Standing lamps, left On appears in the multifunction display.
(turn left two stops)
Switch off the low beam headlamps or the park-
2 Standing lamps, right ing lamps.
(turn left one stop) If the message Switch off lights or
3 M Off remove key. appears in the multifunction
display, remove the SmartKey from the starter
Daytime running lamp mode switch or switch off the automatic headlamp
( page 133) mode.
4 U Automatic headlamp mode ! Failure to switch off the exterior lamps when
Daytime running lamp mode leaving the vehicle may result in a discharged
battery.
( page 133)

131
Controls in detail
Lighting

Low beam headlamps Turn the exterior lamp switch to


The low beam headlamps can be switched
Warning! G position U.
on and off with the exterior lamp switch If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, With the SmartKey in starter switch
using the manual headlamp mode. the headlamps will not be automatically position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button pressed once, the
Turn the exterior lamp switch to switched on under foggy conditions.
tail and parking lamps, the license
position B. To minimize risk to you and to others, plate lamps, and the side marker lamps
The following lamps switch on: activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp will switch on and off depending on the
switch to B when driving or when traffic brightness of the ambient light.
Low beam headlamps
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
Tail and parking lamps you to do so. When the engine is running, the low
beam headlamps, the tail and parking
License plate lamps In low ambient lighting conditions, only
lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
switch from position U to B with the
Side marker lamps side marker lamps will switch on and
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
off depending on the brightness of the
Switching from U to B will briefly
Automatic headlamp mode ambient light.
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
The following lamps switch on and off driving in low ambient lighting conditions i Canada only:
automatically depending on the brightness may result in an accident. High beam headlamps are only available with the
of the ambient light: exterior lamp switch in position B.
The automatic headlamp feature is only an
Low beam headlamps aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
the operation of the vehicles lights at all
Tail and parking lamps
times.
License plate lamps
Side marker lamps

132
Controls in detail
Lighting

Daytime running lamp mode Canada only: When the engine is running and you
In Canada the daytime running lamp mode i With the exterior lamp switch in turn the exterior lamp switch to
is mandatory and therefore in a constant position M or U, you cannot switch on the position C, the low beam head-
mode. high beam headlamps. lamps, the tail and parking lamps, the
The high beam flasher is available at all times. license plate and the side marker
In the USA the daytime running lamp mode
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamps switch on.
is deactivated by default. Activate the day-
time running lamp mode using the control lamp switch to position B to permit activation turn the exterior lamp switch to
system, see Setting daytime running lamp of the high beam headlamps. position B, the manual headlamp
mode (USA only) ( page 163). When the engine is running and you shift mode has priority over the daytime
from a driving position to position N or P running lamp mode
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M or U. with the vehicle at a standstill, the low The corresponding exterior lamps
beam headlamps will switch off with a switch on ( page 131).
When the engine is running, the low delay of 3 minutes.
beam headlamps are switched on.
In low ambient light conditions,
the following lamps will switch on
additionally:
Tail and parking lamps
Side marker lamps
License plate lamps
i With the daytime running lamp mode activat-
ed and the engine running, the low beam head-
lamps cannot be switched off manually.

133
Controls in detail
Lighting

USA only: Locator lighting and night security Fog lamps


illumination
i With the daytime running lamp mode
activated and the exterior lamp switch in Locator lighting and night security illumi- Warning! G
position M, you cannot switch on the high nation are described in the control system
beam headlamps. section, see Setting locator lighting In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
The high beam flasher is available at all times. ( page 164) and Setting night security il- only switch from position U to B with
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lumination ( page 164). the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
lamp switch to position B or U to permit Switching from U to B will briefly
activation of the high beam headlamps. switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
When the engine is running and you turn
may result in an accident.
the exterior lamp switch to position
C or B, the manual headlamp mode
has priority over the daytime running lamp i Fog lamps will operate with the parking
mode. lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
The corresponding exterior lamps switch low beam headlamps. Consult your State or
on ( page 131). Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.

i The fog lamps cannot be switched on with


the exterior lamp switch in position U. To
switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior lamp
switch to position B first.

134
Controls in detail
Lighting

Front fog lamps Rear fog lamp (drivers side only) Combination switch
Turn the exterior lamp switch to Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position C or B ( page 131). position or B ( page 131).
Pull out the exterior lamp switch to Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
first stop. second stop.
The front fog lamps switch on. The front fog lamps and the rear fog
lamp switch on.
The green indicator lamp in the
exterior lamp switch comes on The yellow indicator lamp in the
( page 131). lamp switch comes on ( page 131).
Push in the exterior lamp switch. Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
Combination switch
The front fog lamps are switched off. stop.
1 High beam
The rear fog lamp is switched off. 2 High beam flasher
The green indicator lamp in the
exterior lamp switch goes out. The yellow indicator lamp in the
exterior lamp switch goes out.
The front fog lamps remain lit.

135
Controls in detail
Lighting

High beam Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* Driving forward


Canada only: Turn the exterior lamp
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps Switching on corner-illuminating front
switch to position B ( page 131).
improve illumination of the area in the fog lamps
or direction into which you are turning.
Switch on the left or right turn signal
USA only: Turn the exterior lamp switch The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will ( page 57), depending on whether
to position B or U ( page 131). operate with the engine running and with you are turning left or right.
Push the combination switch in the exterior lamp switch in The respective front fog lamp comes
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the position B ( page 131) on and illuminates the area in the
high beam. direction into which into which you
or
The high beam headlamp indicator are turning.
the exterior lamp switch in
lamp A in the instrument cluster or
position U ( page 131)
comes on.
or Turn the steering wheel in the desired
Pull the combination switch in direction direction.
of arrow 2 to its original position to the daytime running lamp mode
activated ( page 133) The front fog lamp on the side of your
switch off the high beam.
steering direction comes on.
The high beam headlamp indicator i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
lamp A in the instrument cluster only come on in low ambient lighting conditions. i If you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
goes out.
i If you are driving faster than opposite direction, the corner-illuminating lamp
25 mph (40 km/h) or have the front fog lamps comes on for the side indicated by the turn
High beam flasher switched on, the corner-illuminating function is signal.
Pull the combination switch briefly in not available. The corner-illuminating front fog lamp remains lit
direction of arrow 2. for a maximum of 3 minutes. Afterwards, it goes
out even if the turn signal is still switched on.

136
Controls in detail
Lighting

i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps If the turn signal should stay on after Hazard warning flasher
temporarily come on both sides of the vehicle making the turn, the turn signal and
if you turn the steering wheel in one direction corner-illuminating front fog lamp can be The hazard warning flasher can be
and then again in the other direction shortly switched off by returning the combination switched on at all times, even with the
thereafter. switch to its original position. SmartKey removed from the starter switch
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
will come on automatically depending on the
i There may be a brief delay before the removed from the vehicle.
corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
steering angle, even if you did not switch on The hazard warning flasher switches on
either turn signal.
Driving in reverse automatically when an air bag deploys.
If the corner-illuminating front fog lamps came
on automatically, they will also go out automati- The hazard warning flasher switch is
cally depending on the steering angle. Switching on corner-illuminating front located on the upper part of the
fog lamps center console.
Switching off corner-illuminating front Place the gear selector lever in
fog lamps position R.
The combination switch for the turn signal The front fog lamp opposite to your
resets automatically after major steering steering direction comes on.
wheel movements. This will switch off the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they Switching off corner-illuminating front
were activated by switching on the left or fog lamps
right turn signal.
Place the gear selector lever out of
position R.
The respective front fog lamp goes out. 1 Hazard warning flasher switch

137
Controls in detail
Lighting

Switching on the hazard warning Interior lighting Deactivating automatic control


flasher
The interior lighting controls are located in i The interior lighting is factory-set to
Press hazard warning flasher automatic mode.
the overhead control panel.
switch 1.
Slide switch 4 to the right.
All turn signals are flashing.
The interior lighting and the entry/exit
i With the hazard warning flasher activated lamps remain switched off in darkness,
and the combination switch set for either left even when you
or right turn, only the respective left or right
turn signals will operate when the ignition is unlock the vehicle
switched on. remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
Switching off the hazard warning
open a door
flasher
1 Left reading lamp on/off open the trunk
Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again. 2 Right reading lamp on/off
3 Interior lighting on/off
i If the hazard warning flasher was activated 4 Slide switch for interior lighting control
automatically, press hazard warning flasher
switch 1 once to switch it off. ! An interior lamp switched on manually does
not go out automatically.
Leaving the interior lighting switch in the ON
position for extended periods of time with the
engine turned off could result in discharged
batteries.

138
Controls in detail
Lighting

Activating automatic control Manual control Courtesy lighting


Slide switch 4 to the left.
Switching interior lighting on and off For better orientation in the dark, courtesy
The interior lighting switches on in lamps will illuminate the interior of your
Press switch 3.
darkness when you vehicle as follows:
The interior lighting switches on.
unlock the vehicle With parking lamps switched on:
Press switch 3 once more.
remove the SmartKey from the the door handles
starter switch The interior lighting switches off.
the driver and passenger footwells
open a door
Switching reading lamps on and off With SmartKey in starter switch position 1:
In addition, the entry/exit lamps in
Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2 to the door handles
the doors come on.
switch on the desired reading lamp. the center console
open the trunk
Press reading lamp switch 1 or 2
The interior lighting switches off after again to switch off the respective
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and switch off the head-
approximately 10 seconds, see reading lamp. lamps, the door handle lamps will remain lit for
Setting interior lighting delayed approximately 5 minutes.
switch-off ( page 165).
i If a door remains open, the interior lighting Trunk lamp
switches off automatically after approximately
5 minutes. The trunk lamp switches on when the trunk
is opened.
If the trunk lid remains open, the trunk
lighting switches off automatically after ap-
proximately 10 minutes.

139
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

For a full view illustration of the instrument You can change the instrument cluster Adjusting instrument cluster
cluster, see Instrument cluster settings in the Instrument cluster submenu illumination
( page 26). of the control system ( page 160).
Use the reset button to adjust the illumina-
tion brightness for the instrument cluster
Warning! G and the switches on the center console.
No messages will be displayed if either the i The instrument cluster illumination is
instrument cluster or the multifunction dimmed or brightened to suit ambient light
display is inoperative. conditions.
As a result, you will not be able to see
To brighten illumination
information about your driving conditions,
such as speed or outside temperature, Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
warning/indicator lamps, cluster clockwise.
1 Reset button
malfunction/warning messages or the The instrument cluster illumination will
The instrument cluster is activated when failure of any systems. Driving characteris- brighten.
you tics may be impaired.
open a door If you must continue to drive, do so with To dim illumination
switch on the ignition ( page 40) added caution. Visit an authorized
Turn reset button 1 in the instrument
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
press reset button 1 cluster counterclockwise.

switch on the exterior lamps The instrument cluster illumination will


dim.
Opening a door will activate the instrument
cluster only for about 30 seconds.

140
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Coolant temperature gauge ! Excessive coolant temperature triggers the Resetting trip odometer
coolant temperature warning lamp ( page 348)
and a warning in the multifunction display Make sure you are viewing the trip
Warning! G ( page 383). odometer display ( page 143).
The engine should not be operated with the cool- If it is not displayed, press the
Driving when your engine is overheated ant temperature above 248F (120C). Doing so
j or k button on the multi-
can cause some fluids which may have may cause serious engine damage which is not
leaked into the engine compartment to covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited function steering wheel repeatedly
catch fire. You could be seriously Warranty. until the trip odometer appears.
burned. Press and hold reset button 1
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.
Steam from an overheated engine can stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may ( page 140) until the trip odometer is
cause serious burns which can occur rise close to 248F (120C). reset.
just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
until the engine has cooled down.

141
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster

Tachometer Outside temperature indicator The temperature sensor is located in the


front bumper area. Due to its location, the
The red marking on the tachometer de- sensor can be affected by road or engine
notes excessive engine speed. Warning! G heat during idling or slow driving. There-
fore, the accuracy of the displayed temper-
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as The outside temperature indicator is not
it may result in serious engine damage that is not ature can only be verified by comparison to
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited designed to serve as an ice-warning device a thermometer placed next the sensor, not
Warranty. and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. by comparison to external displays, e.g.
Indicated temperatures just above the bank signs, etc.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply
is interrupted if the engine is operated freezing point do not guarantee that the When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
within the red marking. road surface is free of ice. The road may still ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
be icy, especially in wooded areas or on garage), you will notice a delay before the
bridges. lower temperature is displayed.
A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
The outside temperature is displayed in atures rise. This prevents inaccurate
the left or right multifunction display temperature indications caused by heat
( page 160). radiated from the engine during idling or
slow driving.

142
Controls in detail
Control system
Control system
The control system is activated as soon Multifunction display
as the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 or as soon as the The multifunction display consists of the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button is in A drivers attention to the road and traffic display fields in the speedometer and the
position 1. The control system enables conditions must always be his/her primary tachometer. In its default state, the left
you to focus when driving. multifunction display shows the main
For your safety and the safety of others, odometer and the outside temperature,
call up information about your vehicle
selecting features through the multifunction while the trip odometer appears in the
change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the right multifunction display. This default
For example, you can use the control driver when traffic and road conditions setting is referred to as the standard
system to find out when your vehicle is permit it to be done safely. display.
next due for service, to set the language Bear in mind that at a speed of just
for messages in the instrument cluster 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your
display, and much more. vehicle is covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.

The control system relays information to


the multifunction display. 1 Main odometer
2 Outside temperature
3 Current gear selector lever position
4 Trip odometer
5 Automatic transmission program mode

143
Controls in detail
Control system

Multifunction steering wheel 1 Left multifunction display in the 4 Telephone*:


speedometer Press button
The displays in the multifunction display
and the settings in the control system are 2 Right multifunction display in the s to take a call
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- tachometer to dial
tion steering wheel. Operating the control system to redial

3 Selecting the submenu or setting the t to end a call


volume: to reject an incoming call
Press button 5 Menu systems:
up / to increase Press button

down / to decrease for next menu


for previous menu
6 Moving within a menu:
Press button
j for next display
k for previous display

144
Controls in detail
Control system

Depending on the selected menu, pressing It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of functions
the buttons on the multifunction steering functions within each menu, as being ar- you will find a number of submenus for
wheel will alter what appears in the multi- ranged in a circular pattern. calling up and changing settings. For in-
function display. structions on using these submenus, see
If you press button or re-
Settings menu ( page 157).
The information available in the multifunc- peatedly, you will pass through each
tion display are arranged in menus and menu one after the other. The number of menus available in the sys-
accompanying functions or submenus. tem depends on which optional equipment
If you press button k or j re-
is installed in your vehicle.
The individual functions are then found peatedly, you will pass through each
within the relevant menu (radio or CD op- function display, one after the other, in The menus are described on the following
erations under AUDIO, for example). These the current menu. pages.
functions serve to call up relevant informa-
tion or to customize the settings for your
vehicle.

145
Controls in detail
Control system

Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus. overview of the individual menus.

146
Controls in detail
Control system

Menus, submenus and functions

Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5


1
Standard display AMG AUDIO NAV Distronic*
( page 149) ( page 150) ( page 153) ( page 155) ( page 156)
Calling up digital Engine oil temperature Selecting radio station Show route guidance Calling up settings
speedometer/Outside instructions, current
Commands/submenus

temperature direction traveled


Calling up maintenance Vehicle supply voltage Selecting satellite radio
service indicator station
Checking tire inflation RACETIMER Operating CD player
pressure
Checking engine oil Overall analysis
level*
Lap analysis
1 AMG vehicles only.

Table continued on next page.

147
Controls in detail
Control system

Menu 6 Menu 7 Menu 8 Menu 9


Vehicle status Settings Trip computer Telephone*
message memory1
( page 156) ( page 157) ( page 167) ( page 169)
Calling up vehicle Resetting to factory Fuel consumption Loading phone book
malfunction, warning settings statistics since start
and system status
messages stored in
Commands/submenus

memory
Instrument cluster Fuel consumption Searching for name in
submenu statistics since last re- phone book
set
Time submenu Resetting fuel consump-
tion statistics
Lighting submenu Distance to empty
Vehicle submenu
Convenience submenu
1
The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

i The headings used in the menus table are system and are not necessarily identical to automatically show you which part of the system
designed to facilitate navigation within the those shown in the control system displays. you are in.
The first function displayed in each menu will

148
Controls in detail
Control system

Standard display menu You can modify the standard display menu. Calling up digital speedometer or out-
Instead of outside temperature 2, you side temperature
can choose the digital speedometer to be
displayed in the left multifunction display i If you have selected the digital speedometer
for the standard display ( page 161), select the
by changing the setting in the Select outside temperature display here.
Display function of the Inst. Cluster
submenu ( page 161). Press button k or j until the
digital speedometer or, depending on
Press button k or j to select the chosen setting, the outside temper-
1 Main odometer the functions in the standard display
2 Outside temperature ature appears in the right multifunction
menu. display.
3 Current gear selector lever position
4 Trip odometer The following functions are available:
5 Automatic transmission program mode Function Page
Press button or repeatedly Calling up digital speedometer or 149
until you see the standard display outside temperature
menu in the multifunction display.
Calling up maintenance service 332
indicator
Checking tire inflation pressure 302
Checking engine oil level* 284

149
Controls in detail
Control system

AMG menu Use buttons k or j to select the fol- Vehicle supply voltage
lowing functions in the AMG menu:
Press button or repeatedly
i This function is only available in AMG Function Page until you see the AMG menu.
vehicles.
Vehicle supply voltage 150 Press button j repeatedly until you
The main screen of the AMG menu shows
see the vehicle supply voltage.
you the gear currently engaged as well as RACETIMER 151
the engine oil temperature. Overall analysis 153
Press button or repeatedly Lap analysis 153
until you see the AMG menu.
i If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next to
1 Vehicle supply voltage
gear indicator 2 as a reminder to upshift.
2 Gear indicator

1 Engine oil temperature


2 Gear indicator
i The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if
the engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80C. During this time, avoid driving at full
engine speed.

150
Controls in detail
Control system

RACETIMER Starting the RACETIMER


Press button .
Warning! G The timer starts.
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
Displaying intermediate time
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads 1 Lap Press button while the timer is
is prohibited under all circumstances and 2 RACETIMER running.
the driver is and must always remain 3 Gear indicator The intermediate time is shown for
responsible for following posted speed 5 seconds.
limits. i You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 ( page 40). Stopping the RACETIMER
The RACETIMER allows you to time and
Press button .
save driving stretches in hours, minutes i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
and seconds. you cannot adjust the volume using The timer stops.
buttons or .
Press button or repeatedly i When you stop the vehicle and turn the
until you see the AMG menu. SmartKey to position 1 ( page 40) or, in vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and
Press button j repeatedly until you do not open the drivers door, the RACETIMER
see the RACETIMER. stops timing. Timing is resumed when you
switch the ignition back on ( page 40) or
restart the engine ( page 53) and then press
the button.

151
Controls in detail
Control system

Saving lap time and starting a new lap Deleting all laps
i You can save up to nine laps. i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
Press button while the timer is Press button while the timer is
running. running.
The intermediate time will be shown for The timer stops.
5 seconds. 1 Best lap time
Press the reset button twice
2 Lap number
Press button within the next ( page 27).
3 RACETIMER
5 seconds.
4 Gear indicator Press button .
The intermediate time shown will be
The timer starts. The saved laps are
saved as a lap time. Resetting current lap deleted.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new Press button while the timer is
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as i When you switch off the engine, the
running. RACETIMER will be reset to0 after 30 seconds.
soon as the intermediate time is called All laps are deleted.
The timer stops.
up.
Press button .
The lap time is reset to 0.

152
Controls in detail
Control system

Overall analysis Lap analysis AUDIO menu


i These functions are only available if you i These functions are only available if you The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
have saved at least one lap and have stopped the have saved at least two laps and have stopped
the audio equipment which you currently
RACETIMER. the RACETIMER.
have turned on.
Press button or repeatedly Press button or repeatedly
If no audio equipment is currently turned
until you see the AMG menu. until you see the AMG menu.
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the
Press button j repeatedly until you Press button j repeatedly until you right multifunction display.
see the overall analysis. see the lap analysis.
The following functions are available:
Function Page
Selecting radio station 154
Selecting satellite radio station 154
Operating CD player 155
1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER 1 Lap number
2 Overall driving time 2 Lap time
3 Maximum speed 3 Maximum speed
4 Average speed 4 Average speed during lap
5 Overall distance driven 5 Lap length
Press button j or k to see other
lap analyses.
i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.

153
Controls in detail
Control system

Selecting radio station Selecting satellite radio station i Additional optional satellite radio equipment
and a subscription to satellite radio service pro-
Turn on COMAND and select radio. Re- The satellite radio is treated as a radio
vider are required for satellite radio operation.
fer to the separate operating instruc- application. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
tions. for details and availability for your vehicle.
Select satellite radio with the corre-
Press button or repeatedly sponding key on the COMAND control For more information, refer to separate
until you see the currently tuned sta- panel (SAT). COMAND operating instructions.
tion in the right multifunction display.
Press button or repeatedly
until you see the currently tuned sta-
tion in the right multifunction display.

1 Waveband setting
2 Station frequency
Press button k or j repeatedly 1 SAT mode
until the desired station is found. 2 Channel name or number
i You can only store new stations using the Press button k or j repeatedly
designated feature on the radio. Refer to the until the desired channel is found.
separate operating instructions.

154
Controls in detail
Control system

Operating the CD player i To select a CD from the magazine of the NAV menu
CD changer, press a number on the COMAND
Selecting CD track system key pad located in the upper center The NAV menu contains the functions
console. needed to operate your navigation system.
Turn on COMAND and select CD. Refer
to the separate COMAND operating Press button or repeatedly
Selecting MP3-CD track
instructions. until you see the message NAV in the
Turn on COMAND and select MP3-CD. left multifunction display.
Press button or repeatedly Refer to the separate COMAND
until the settings for the CD currently The message shown in the multifunction
operating instructions.
being played appear in the right multi- display depends on the status of the
function display. Press button or repeatedly navigation system:
until the settings for the MP3-CD
With COMAND switched off, the
currently being played appear in the
message NAV OFF appears in the
right multifunction display.
multifunction display.
With COMAND switched on but route
guidance not activated, the direction of
travel and, if applicable, the name of
1 Current CD (with additional number the street currently traveled on appear
from 1 to 6 when running from CD in the multifunction display.
changer)
1 Current track With COMAND switched on and route
2 Current track
guidance activated, the direction of
Press button k or j repeatedly Press button k or j repeatedly travel and maneuver instructions
until the desired track is selected. until the desired track is selected. appear in the multifunction display.

155
Controls in detail
Control system

Please refer to the COMAND manual for Vehicle status message memory menu
instructions on how to activate the route Warning! G
guidance system. Use the vehicle status message memory
menu to scan malfunction and warning Malfunction and warning messages are only
Distronic* menu messages that may be stored in the sys- indicated for certain systems and are inten-
tem. Such messages appear in the multi- tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
Use the DISTRONIC menu ( page 222) to function display and are based on and warning messages are simply a remind-
display the current settings for your Dis- conditions or system status the vehicles er with respect to the operation of certain
tronic system. The information shown in system has recorded. systems and do not replace the owners
the multifunction display depends on and/or drivers responsibility to maintain
The vehicle status message memory menu
whether the Distronic system is activated the vehicles operating safety by having all
only appears, if messages have been
or deactivated. required maintenance and safety checks
stored.
performed on the vehicle and by bringing
Please refer to the Driving systems sec-
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
tion of this manual ( page 218) for in-
Center to address the malfunction and
structions on how to activate Distronic.
warning messages ( page 359).
Press button or repeatedly
to select the DISTRONIC menu in the Press button or repeatedly
multifunction display. until the vehicle status message mem-
ory menu appears in the multifunction
display.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, no messages
have been stored.

156
Controls in detail
Control system

If conditions have occurred causing status Should the vehicles system record any Settings menu
messages to be recorded, the number of conditions while driving, the number of
messages appears in the right multifunc- messages will reappear in the multifunc- In the Settings menu there are two
tion display: tion display functions:
when the SmartKey in the starter The function Reset, with which you can
switch is turned to position 0 or reset most settings to those set at the
removed from the starter switch factory.
or A collection of submenus with which
you can make individual settings for
when you turn off the engine by press-
your vehicle.
1 Number of recorded status messages ing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
button on the gear selector lever once The following settings and submenus are
Press button k or j. and open the drivers door (this puts available:
The stored messages will now be dis- the starter switch in position 0, same
Function Page
played in the order in which they have as with the SmartKey removed from
occurred. For malfunction and warning the starter switch) Resetting all settings 158
messages, see Vehicle status messag- Submenus in the Settings menu 158
i The vehicle status message memory will be
es in the multifunction display cleared when you then turn the SmartKey in the Instrument cluster submenu 160
( page 359). starter switch to position 1 or 2, or when you
press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once
Time submenu 161
i After you have scrolled through all recorded or twice without depressing the brake pedal. You Lighting submenu 163
status messages, the first recorded message will then only see high priority messages in the
appears again. multifunction display ( page 359). Vehicle submenu 166
Convenience submenu 166

157
Controls in detail
Control system

Resetting all settings Press the reset button again. Press button .
You can reset the functions of most of the The functions of most submenus will The selection marker moves to the next
submenus to the factory settings. reset to factory settings. submenu.
For safety, the Light Circuit Headlamp i The settings you have changed will not be Scroll down with the button,
Mode submenu in the Lighting menu can reset unless you confirm the action by pressing scroll up with the button.
be reset with the vehicle at standstill only. the reset button a second time.
With the selection marker on the de-
Press button or repeatedly sired submenu, use the j button to
Submenus in the Settings menu
until the Settings menu appears in the access the individual functions within
multifunction display. Press button or repeatedly that submenu.
until the Settings menu appears in the
Once within the submenu, use
multifunction display.
the j button to move to the next
Press button j. function or the k button to move to
In the right multifunction display you the previous function within that sub-
see the collection of submenus. There menu.
are more submenus than can be simul- Use buttons or to change
Press the reset button in the instru- taneously displayed. the settings of the respective function.
ment cluster for approximately
3 seconds.
In the right multifunction display you
will see the request to press the reset
button again to confirm.

158
Controls in detail
Control system

The table below shows what settings can


be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.

Instrument cluster Time Lighting Vehicle Convenience


( page 160) ( page 161) ( page 163) ( page 166) ( page 166)
Selecting speedometer Synchronizing time with Setting daytime running Setting automatic locking Activating
display mode head unit lamp mode (USA only) easy-entry/exit feature
Selecting standard Setting the time (hour) Setting locator lighting
display
Selecting language Setting the time Setting night security
(minutes) illumination
Setting interior lighting
delayed switch-off

159
Controls in detail
Control system

Instrument cluster submenu Selecting speedometer display mode Selecting language


Access the Inst. Cluster submenu via Move the selection marker with Move the selection marker with
the Settings menu. Use the Inst. button or to the button or to the
Cluster submenu to change the instru- Inst. Cluster submenu. Inst. Cluster submenu.
ment cluster display settings. The follow-
Press button j or k Press button j or k repeatedly
ing functions are available:
repeatedly until the message until the message Language appears in
Digital Speedometer appears in the the multifunction display.
Function Page
multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current
Selecting speedometer display 160
The selection marker is on the current setting.
mode
setting.
Selecting language 160
Selecting standard display 161

Press button or to set the


speedometer units to Kilometers or
Miles.

160
Controls in detail
Control system

Press button or to select Selecting standard display Time submenu


the language to be used for the
Move the selection marker with Access the Time submenu via the Settings
multifunction display messages.
button or to the menu. Use the Time submenu to change
Available languages: Inst. Cluster submenu. the time and date settings. The following
functions are available:
German Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Select Display ap-
English Function Page
pears in the multifunction display.
French Synchronizing time with head 161
The selection marker is on the current
unit
Italian setting.
Setting the time (hour) 162
Spanish
Setting the time (minutes) 162
Dutch
Swedish Synchronizing time with head unit
Danish Move the selection marker with
Turkish the or button to the Time
Press button or to select submenu.
Portuguese the desired setting.
Press button j or k repeatedly
The selected option appears in the left until the message Time Synchron.
multifunction display. With Head Unit appears in the multi-
The option not selected will appear in function display.
the right multifunction display when The selection marker is on the current
scrolling through the standard display setting.
( page 149).

161
Controls in detail
Control system

Setting the time (hour) Setting the time (minutes)


This function is only available if the func- This function is only available if the func-
tion Time Synchron. With Head Unit tion Time Synchron. With Head Unit
( page 161) has been set to Off. The time ( page 161) has been set to Off. The time
is then not set automatically by the is then not set automatically by the
COMAND and must be set manually if COMAND and must be set manually if
Press button or enable or required. required.
disable this feature. Move the selection marker with Move the selection marker with
When you set this feature to On, the time the or button to the Time the or button to the Time
displayed in the multifunction display is submenu. submenu.
automatically synchronized with the time Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly
of the COMAND system. until the message Set Time Hour until the message Set Time Minute(s)
i For information on setting the time, refer to appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display.
the separate COMAND operating instructions. The selection marker is on the hour The selection marker is on the minute
setting. setting.

Press button or to set the Press button or to set the


hour. minutes.

162
Controls in detail
Control system

Lighting submenu Setting daytime running lamp mode With daytime running lamp mode activated
(USA only) and the exterior lamp switch in
Access the Lighting submenu via the
position M or U the low beam head-
Settings menu. Use the Lighting sub- i This function is not available in countries lamps are switched on when the engine is
menu to change the lamp and lighting set- where the daytime running lamp mode is manda-
tory and therefore in a constant mode. running.
tings on your vehicle. The following
functions are available: Move the selection marker with In low ambient light conditions the follow-
button or to the Lighting ing lamps will switch on additionally:
Function Page
submenu. Parking lamps
Setting daytime running lamp 163
mode (USA only) Press button j or k repeatedly Tail lamps
until the message Light Circuit
Setting locator lighting 164 License plate lamps
Headlamp Mode appears in the multi-
Setting night security illumina- 164 function display. Side marker lamps
tion
The selection marker is on the current For more information on the daytime run-
Setting interior lighting delayed 165 setting. ning lamp mode, see Lighting
switch-off ( page 131).
i For safety reasons, resetting to factory
settings ( page 158) while driving will not
deactivate the daytime running lamp mode.
The following message appears in the multifunc-
tion display: Cannot be fully reset to
Press button or to select factory settings while driving.
manual operation (Manual) or daytime
running lamp mode (Constant).

163
Controls in detail
Control system

Setting locator lighting Move the selection marker with Setting night security illumination
button or to the Lighting (Headlamps delayed switch-off feature)
With the locator lighting feature activated
and the exterior lamp switch in submenu. Use this function to set whether you would
position U, the following lamps will Press button j or k repeatedly like the exterior lamps to remain on for
switch on during darkness when the until the message Locator Lighting 15 seconds during darkness after exiting
vehicle is unlocked using button on appears in the multifunction display. the vehicle and closing the doors.
the SmartKey or SmartKey with
The selection marker is on the current With the headlamps delayed switch-off
KEYLESS-GO*:
setting. feature activated and the exterior lamp
Parking lamps switch in position U before the engine
is turned off, the following lamps will
Tail lamps
switch on when the engine is turned off:
License plate lamps
Parking lamps
Front fog lamps
Tail lamps
Side marker lamps
Press button or to switch License plate lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the the locator lighting feature On or Off. Side marker lamps
drivers door is opened.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to Front fog lamps
If you do not open a door after unlocking position U when exiting the vehicle.
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps If after turning off the engine you do not
will switch off automatically after approxi- The locator lighting feature is open a door or do not close an opened
mately 40 seconds. activated. door, the lamps will switch off auto-
matically after 60 seconds.

164
Controls in detail
Control system

Move the selection marker with You can temporarily deactivate the Move the selection marker with
button or to the Lighting headlamps delayed switch-off feature: button or to the Lighting
submenu. submenu.
Before exiting the vehicle turn the
Press button j or k repeatedly SmartKey in the starter switch to Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Headlamps Delayed position 0. until the message Interior Lighting
Switch-off appears in the multifunc- Delayed Switch-off appears in the
Then turn it to position 2 and back to
tion display. multifunction display.
position 0.
The selection marker is on the current The selection marker is on the current
The headlamps delayed switch-off
setting. setting.
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button on the gear selector lever
Press button or to switch ( page 41). Press button or to switch
the headlamps delayed switch-off the interior lighting delayed switch-off
feature On or Off. Setting interior lighting delayed feature On or Off.
switch-off
Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position U before turning off the Use this function to set whether you would
engine. like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
The headlamps delayed switch-off removed the SmartKey from the starter
feature is activated. switch.

165
Controls in detail
Control system

Vehicle submenu Press button j or k repeatedly Convenience submenu


until the message Automatic Door
Access the Vehicle submenu via the Access the Convenience submenu via the
Lock appears in the multifunction
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu Settings menu. Use the Convenience sub-
display.
to make general vehicle settings. The menu to change the settings for a number
following functions are available: The selection marker is on the current of convenience features. The following
setting. functions are available:
Function Page
Setting automatic locking 166 Function Page
Activating easy-entry/exit 166
Setting automatic locking feature
Use this function to activate or deactivate
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
the automatic central locking. With the
automatic central locking system Press button or to switch Use this function to activate and deacti-
activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at the Automatic Door Lock function vate the easy-entry/exit feature
a vehicle speed of approximately On or Off. ( page 47).
9 mph (15 km/h).
Move the selection marker with
the or button to the
Vehicle submenu.

166
Controls in detail
Control system

Move the selection marker with Trip computer menu


Warning! G the or button to the
Convenience submenu. Use the trip computer menu to call up
You must make sure no one can become statistical data on your vehicle.
Press button j or k repeatedly
trapped or injured by the moving steering The following information is available:
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is until the message Easy-entry
activated. Function appears in the multifunction Function Page
display. Fuel consumption statistics 168
To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
the following: The selection marker is on the current since start
setting. Fuel consumption statistics 168
Move steering wheel adjustment stalk
( page 47). since last reset
Press one of the memory position Resetting fuel consumption 168
buttons* or the memory button M* statistics
( page 129). Distance to empty 169
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Press button or to switch i The last function called up will reappear the
Children could open the drivers door and next time you enter the trip computer menu.
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off.
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.

167
Controls in detail
Control system

Fuel consumption statistics since start Fuel consumption since last reset Resetting fuel consumption statistics
Press button or repeatedly Press button or repeatedly Press button or repeatedly
until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu. trip computer menu. trip computer menu.
Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly Press button j or k repeatedly
until you see this message in the left until you see this message in the left until you see the reading that you want
multifunction display: From Start. multifunction display: From Reset. to reset in the left multifunction dis-
play.
Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster ( page 27) until
the value is reset to 0.
i The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 when either of the following
1 Distance driven since start 1 Distance driven since last reset values is exceeded:
2 Average speed since start 2 Average speed since last reset distance covered: 100000 miles
3 Time elapsed since start 3 Time elapsed since last reset
time elapsed: 10000 hours
4 Average fuel consumption since start 4 Average fuel consumption since last
reset
i All statistics stored since the last engine
start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.

168
Controls in detail
Control system

Distance to empty TEL* menu


Never operate radio transmitters equipped
Press button or repeatedly with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
until you see the first function of the
trip computer menu.
Warning! G out being connected to an external antenna)
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
Press button j or k repeatedly A drivers attention to the road must always
tion of the vehicles electronic system,
until you see this message in the left be his/her primary focus when driving. For
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
multifunction display: Range. your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
personal injury.
ommend that you pull over to a safe location
In the right multifunction display you
and stop before placing or taking a tele-
will see the calculated range based on You can use the functions in the TEL menu
phone call. If you choose to use the tele-
the current fuel tank level. to operate your telephone, provided it is
phone while driving, please use the
hands-free device and only use the tele- connected to a hands-free system and
phone when weather, road, and traffic con- switched on.
ditions permit. Switch on the telephone and COMAND.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from Press button or on the
using a cellular telephone while driving a steering wheel repeatedly until the
vehicle. TEL menu appears in the left multi-
i If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a function display.
vehicle at the fuel pump is shown instead of the Bear in mind that at a speed of just
range. 30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your
vehicle is covering a distance of
44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.

169
Controls in detail
Control system

Which messages will appear in the right Answering a call Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
multifunction display depends on whether call
When your telephone is ready to receive
your telephone is switched on or off: calls, you can answer a call at any time. Press button t.
If the telephone is off, the message in In the right multifunction display you will
the multifunction display is: TEL OFF. then see the message or, if available, the Dialing a number from the phone book
caller ID (name and number):
If the telephone is on: If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
The telephone will then search for a
phone book at any time.
network. During this time the right mul-
tifunction display is empty. Press button or repeatedly
As soon as the telephone has found a until the TEL menu appears in the left
network, READY is indicated in the right multifunction display.
multifunction display. Press button s. In the right multifunction display you
will see the standby message.
You have answered the call.
The duration of the call appears in the
right multifunction display.

This standby message indicates that


your telephone is ready for use and you
can operate it using the control
system.

170
Controls in detail
Control system

Press button j or k. Press button s. Redialing


The control system reads the phone The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most
book which is stored in the telephone. number. recently dialed phone numbers. This elimi-
This may take several minutes. In the nates the need to search through your
If the connection is successful and this
right multifunction display the message entire phone book.
feature is supported by your network
Please Wait appears.
provider, the name of the party you are Press button or repeatedly
When the message Please Wait calling (if stored in your phone book) until the TEL menu appears in the left
disappears, the phone book has been and the duration of the call will appear multifunction display.
loaded. in the multifunction display.
In the right multifunction display you
Press button j or k repeatedly will see the standby message.
until the desired name appears in the
Press button s.
right multifunction display.
In the right multifunction display you
The stored names are displayed in
see the first number in the redial mem-
ascending or descending alphabetical
ory.
order.
If no connection is made, the control Press button j or k repeatedly
i If you press and hold j or k for system stores the dialed number in the until the desired name appears in the
longer than one second, the system scrolls redial memory. right multifunction display.
rapidly through the list of names until you
release the button again. Press button s.
Cancel the quick search mode by pressing The control system dials the selected
button t.
phone number.

171
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

For more information on driving with an Gear selector lever


automatic transmission, see Automatic Warning! G
transmission ( page 53). The gear selector lever is located on the
Make sure that absolutely no objects are lower part of the center console.
Your vehicles transmission adapts its gear obstructing the pedals range of movement.
shifting process to your individual driving Keep the drivers footwell clear of all obsta-
style by continually adjusting the shift cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
points up or down. These shift point adjust- the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
ments are performed based on current have sufficient clearance.
operating and driving conditions.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
If the operating conditions change, the the objects could get caught between the
automatic transmission reacts by pedals. You could then no longer brake or
adjusting its shift program. accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
i During the brief warm-up, transmission injury.
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
converter to heat up more quickly to operating
temperature. P Park position
R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
i The current gear selector lever
position P, R, N or D appears in the right
multifunction display ( page 174).

172
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Shifting procedure ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.


Warning! G Do not place full load on the engine until the
The automatic transmission selects indi- operating temperature has been reached.
It is dangerous to shift the gear selector vidual gears automatically, depending on: Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
lever out of park position P or neutral when the vehicle is stopped.
gear selector lever position D
position N if the engine speed is higher than
( page 174) with gear ranges Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the period when driving off on slippery road
( page 176)
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose the selected program mode: drivetrain which is not covered by the
control of the vehicle and hit someone or Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
(C/S) ( page 177)
something. Only shift into gear when the When the gear selector lever is in drive
engine is idling normally and when your right or
position D, you can influence transmission
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. (MANUAL/C/S) (SL 55 AMG and shifting by:
SL 65 AMG only) ( page 182)
limiting the gear range
the position of the accelerator pedal
changing gears manually
( page 175)
the vehicle speed

173
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear selector lever positions Effect Effect


The current gear selector lever position Park position Reverse gear
appears in the right multifunction display. Gear selector lever position Place gear selector lever in
when the vehicle is parked. Place position R only when vehicle is
gear selector lever in park stopped.
position P only when vehicle is Neutral
stopped. The park position is not
intended to serve as a brake No power is transmitted from the
when the vehicle is parked. engine to the drive axle. When
Rather, the driver should always the brakes are released, the
1 Current gear selector lever position vehicle can be moved freely
set the parking brake in addition
to placing the gear selector lever (pushed or towed).
in park position P to secure the To avoid damage to the trans-
vehicle. mission, never engage neutral
The SmartKey can only be position N while driving.
removed from the starter switch If the ESP is deactivated or
with the gear selector lever in malfunctioning:
park position P. With the Move gear selector lever to neu-
SmartKey removed, the gear tral position N only if the vehicle
selector lever is locked in park is in danger of skidding, e.g. on
position P. icy roads.

174
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Effect Driving tips


Do not park this vehicle in areas where
Drive combustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot Accelerator position
The transmission shifts exhaust system, as these materials could be
automatically. All forward gears Your driving style influences the
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
are available. transmissions shifting behavior:
Less throttle Earlier upshifting
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other Warning! G More throttle Later upshifting
reason with gear selector lever in neutral
position N can result in transmission damage
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Kickdown
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the starter switch, take it with you, and Use kickdown when you want maximum
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- acceleration.
Warning! G tended in the vehicle, or with access to an Press the accelerator past the point of
unlocked vehicle. Children could move the resistance.
Getting out of your vehicle with the gear gear selector lever from park position P,
selector lever not fully engaged in park which could result in an accident and/or
Depending on the engine speed the
position P is dangerous. Also, park serious personal injury.
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
position P alone is not intended to or capa- Ease on the accelerator when you have
ble of preventing your vehicle from moving, reached the desired speed.
possibly hitting people or objects.
The transmission shifts up again.
Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting to park position P ( page 63).
When parked on an incline, turn the front
wheels towards the road curb.

175
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Stopping Maneuvering Gear ranges


When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights: When you maneuver in tight areas,
With the gear selector lever in drive
e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
Leave the transmission in gear. position D and driving in program mode C
Control the vehicle speed by gradually or S, you can select a gear range for the
Hold the vehicle with the brake.
releasing the brakes. automatic transmission to operate within.
When you stop for a longer period of time
Accelerate gently. Gear selector lever ( page 179):
with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
Never abruptly step on the accelerator. You can limit the gear range by pressing
Set the parking brake. the gear selector lever to the left (D-), and
Move the gear selector lever to park Working on the vehicle reverse the gear range limit by pressing
position P. the gear selector lever to the right (D+).

Warning! G Steering wheel gearshift control*


( page 180):
When working on the vehicle, set the You can limit the gear range by pulling the
parking brake and move gear selector lever left gearshift paddle on the steering wheel
to park position P. Otherwise the vehicle gearshift control, and reverse the gear
could roll away. range limit by pulling the right gearshift
paddle on the steering wheel gearshift
control.

176
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

The selected gear range appears in the Effect Automatic shift program
right multifunction display.
The transmission shifts through The program mode selector switch is
third gear only. located on the lower part of the center
With this selection you can use console.
the braking effect of the engine.
The transmission shifts through
second gear only.
1 Current gear range Allows the use of engines
braking power when driving
Effect
on steep downgrades
The transmission shifts through
sixth gear only (applies to in mountainous regions
vehicles with 7-speed automatic under extreme operating
transmission only). conditions Program mode selector switch
The transmission shifts through The transmission operates in C Comfort For comfort driving
fifth gear only (applies to first gear only. S Sport For standard driving
vehicles with 7-speed automatic
transmission only). For maximum use of engines
braking effect on very steep or
The transmission shifts through lengthy downgrades.
fourth gear only.

177
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

The selected program mode appears in the Press program mode selector switch
right multifunction display. repeatedly until the letter of the
desired program mode appears in the
right multifunction display.
Select C for comfort driving:
The vehicle starts out in second
gear (both forward and reverse) for
gentler starts. This does not apply if
1 Current program mode full throttle is applied or gear
Program mode selector switch ! Never change the program mode when the range 1 is selected.
(SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only) gear selector lever is out of park position P. This Traction and driving stability are
MANUAL For manual gear shifting could result in a change of driving characteristics improved on icy roads.
( page 182) for which you may not be prepared.
Upshifts occur earlier even when
C Comfort For comfort driving i The last selected program mode (C or S) is you give more gas. The engine then
switched on when the engine is restarted.
S Sport For standard driving operates at lower rpms and the
wheels are less likely to spin.
Select S for standard driving:
The vehicle starts out in first gear.
Upshifts occur later.

178
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Gear selector lever one-touch The following instructions describe opera- Extending gear range
gearshifting tion of the gear selector lever when driving
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
in the automatic program mode C or S.
the right in the D+ direction.
With the gear selector lever in drive posi-
tion D and driving in program mode C or S, Limiting gear range The transmission will shift to the next
you can limit or extend the gear range. higher gear as permitted by the shift
program. This action simultaneously
If your vehicle is equipped with the Warning! G extends the gear range of the transmis-
MANUAL shift program, you can use the
sion.
gear selector lever to manually shift the On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
gears. in order to obtain braking action. This could i If you press on the accelerator when the en-
result in drive wheel slip and reduced gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
i For information on using the gear selector vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
lever in program mode MANUAL, see Manual
shift program (SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG prevent this type of loss of control.
only) ( page 182).
Briefly press the gear selector lever to
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the the left in the D- direction.
operating temperature has been reached. The transmission will shift to the next
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only lower gear as permitted by the shift
when the vehicle is stopped. program. This action simultaneously
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended limits the gear range of the transmis-
period when driving off on slippery road sion ( page 176).
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engines max. speed would be
exceeded.

179
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Canceling gear range limit Steering wheel gearshift control ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
one-touch gearshifting* Do not place full load on the engine until the
Press and hold the gear selector lever
operating temperature has been reached.
in the D+ direction until D reappears in
Steering wheel gearshift control is avail- Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
the right multifunction display
able on vehicles with Sport Package*, on when the vehicle is stopped.
( page 174).
SL 55 AMG, and on SL 65 AMG only. Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
The transmission will shift from the period when driving off on slippery road
With the gear selector lever in drive
current gear range directly to gear surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
position D and driving in program mode C
range D. drivetrain which is not covered by the
or S, you can limit or extend the gear Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
range.
Shifting into optimal gear range
If your vehicle is equipped with the
Press and hold the gear selector lever
MANUAL shift program, you can use the
in the D- direction.
steering wheel gearshift control to
The transmission will automatically manually shift the gears.
select the gear range suited for optimal
acceleration and deceleration. This will i For information on using the steering
wheel gearshift control in program mode
involve shifting down one or more MANUAL, see Manual shift program
gears. (SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only)
( page 182).

180
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Limiting gear range Extending gear range


Briefly pull right shift paddle 2.
Warning! G The transmission will shift to the next
higher gear as permitted by the shift
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
program. This action simultaneously
in order to obtain braking action. This could
extends the gear range of the transmis-
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
sion.
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control. i If you press on the accelerator when the en-
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
Gearshift paddles (example illustration) will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
Briefly pull left shift paddle 1.
1 Left shift paddle: limiting gear range or
downshift (in MANUAL program mode) The transmission will shift to the next
2 Right shift paddle: extending gear lower gear as permitted by the shift
range or upshift (in MANUAL program program. This action simultaneously
mode) limits the gear range of the transmis-
sion ( page 176).
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
gearshift paddles when the gear selector lever is i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
in position P, N or R. shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
gear if the engines max. speed would be
The following instructions describe opera- exceeded.
tion of the steering wheel gearshift control
when driving in the automatic program
mode C or S.

181
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Canceling gear range limit Manual shift program The program mode selector switch is
(SL 55 AMG and SL 65 AMG only) located on the lower part of the center
Pull and hold right shift paddle 2
console.
until D reappears in the right multifunc-
In addition to the automatic shift
tion display ( page 174).
program C or S, your vehicle is equipped
The transmission will shift from the with the MANUAL shift program.
current gear range directly to gear
In the MANUAL program mode,
range D.
system-controlled automatic gearshifting
is switched off and you need to change the
Shifting into optimal gear range
gears by manually upshifting or downshift-
Pull and hold left shift paddle 1. ing using the steering wheel gearshift
The transmission will automatically paddles ( page 181) or the gear selector
select the gear range suited for optimal lever.
Program mode selector switch
acceleration and deceleration. This will ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
involve shifting down one or more MANUAL For manual gear shifting
Do not place full load on the engine until the
gears. operating temperature has been reached. C Comfort For comfort driving
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only S Sport For standard driving
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
The selected program mode appears in the
period when driving off on slippery road right multifunction display ( page 178).
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
i For information on automatic program
modes C or S, see Automatic shift program
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
( page 177), Gear selector lever one-touch
gearshifting ( page 179), and Steering wheel
gearshift control one-touch gearshifting*
( page 180).

182
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Activating manual shift program Upshifting If you have selected the AMG menu in the
control system and you are driving in the
Press program mode selector switch ! In the MANUAL program mode, the trans- MANUAL program mode, upshift
repeatedly until the M for MANUAL mission will not upshift, even if the engine has
reached its overrevving range. Shift up to the indicator 2 in the right multifunction
program mode appears in the right
next gear before the engine has reached its over- display advises you to upshift before the
multifunction display.
revving range. Make absolutely certain that the engine reaches the overspeed range. Thus
The transmission switches to the engine speed does not reach the red marking on you can drive at the maximum engine
MANUAL program mode. Automatic the tachometer ( page 26). Otherwise the speed for each gear without overrevving
shifting is switched off. The gear range engine could be damaged which is not covered the engine.
is not limited. by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

You can change the gears manually when Briefly press the gear selector lever to
the gear selector lever is in drive the right in the D+ direction.
position D. You can upshift or downshift or
through the gears in succession.
Briefly pull right shift paddle 2
i The MANUAL program mode will not be ( page 181).
stored. When the engine is turned off with the 1 Gear indicator
MANUAL program mode selected, the transmis- The transmission shifts to the next 2 Upshift indicator
sion will go to the automatic program mode higher gear.
(C or S) when the engine is restarted. Shift to the next higher gear.
If, instead of the manual program mode
symbol M, the symbol p appears in the The fuel supply will otherwise be inter-
right multifunction display ( page 178), rupted to prevent the engine from over-
shift to the next higher gear. The fuel revving.
supply will otherwise be interrupted to
prevent the engine from overrevving.

183
Controls in detail
Automatic transmission

Downshifting Kickdown Emergency operation


Using the kickdown when driving in the (Limp-Home Mode)
Warning! G MANUAL program mode is not possible.
If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-
sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift Deactivating manual shift program
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
in order to obtain braking action. This could
Press the program mode selector likely operating in limp-home (emergency
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
switch ( page 182) repeatedly operation) mode. In this mode only second
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
until C or S appears in the right gear and reverse gear can be activated.
prevent this type of loss of control.
multifunction display.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
or
Briefly press the gear selector lever to Move the gear selector lever to park
the left in the D- direction. Restart the engine. position P.
or The transmission will go to the Turn off the engine.
automatic program mode (C or S).
Briefly pull left shift paddle 1 Wait at least 10 seconds before
( page 181). The MANUAL program mode is not restarting.
stored.
The transmission shifts to the next Restart the engine.
lower gear.
Move the gear selector lever to drive
i When you brake or stop, the transmission position D (for second gear) or
shifts down to a gear from which you can easily position R.
accelerate or take off.
Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible.

184
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Good visibility
For information on windshield wipers, see Press button 1. Rear view mirrors
Windshield wipers ( page 58).
The headlamps are cleaned with a
For information on setting the rear view
high-pressure water jet.
Headlamp cleaning system mirrors, see Mirrors ( page 49).
i The headlamps will automatically be
The headlamp cleaning button is located cleaned when you have Auto-dimming rear view mirrors
on the left side of the dashboard. switched on the headlamps The reflection brightness of the exterior
and rear view mirror on the drivers side and
operated the windshield wipers with wind- the interior rear view mirror will respond
shield washer fluid fifteen times automatically to glare when
When you switch off the ignition, the counter the ignition is switched on
resets.
and
For information on filling up the washer
reservoir, see Windshield washer system incoming light from headlamps falls on
and headlamp cleaning system the sensor in the interior rear view mir-
( page 289). ror.
1 Headlamp cleaning button The interior rear view mirror will not react if
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). reverse gear is engaged
the interior lighting is switched on

185
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Sun visors
Warning! G
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
The auto-dimming function does not react if while driving.
incoming light is not aimed directly at sen-

G
sors in the interior rear view mirror.
Warning!
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the drivers side do not Do not use the drivers-side vanity mirror
react, for example, if the wind screen is in- while driving.
stalled.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors 1 Mounting
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected 2 Vanity mirror cover
(incident light) could blind you. As a result, glare can endanger you and others. 3 Vanity mirror lamp
you may not be able to observe traffic con-
4 Holder for gas cards
ditions and could cause an accident.

Glare through the windshield

Warning! G Make sure the sun visor is properly


engaged in mounting 1.
Exercise care when using the passen- Swing the respective sun visor down.
ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
surface is convex (outwardly curved surface When you do not experience glare any-
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror more, swing the sun visor up.
are closer than they appear. Check your in-
terior rear view mirror or glance over your
shoulder before changing lanes.

186
Controls in detail
Good visibility

Glare through a door window Rear window defroster Deactivating


Swing respective sun visor down. Press button F ( page 190) once
The rear window defroster uses a large
more.
Disengage the sun visor from amount of power. To keep the battery
mounting 1. drain to a minimum, switch off the defrost- The indicator lamp on the button goes
er as soon as the rear window is clear. The out.
i When the sun visor is disengaged from defroster is automatically deactivated af-
mounting 1, vanity mirror lamp 3 switches
ter approximately 6 to 17 minutes of oper-
! The rear window defroster cannot be
off. switched on when the retractable hardtop is
ation depending on the outside open. The indicator lamp will start flashing if the
Pivot the sun visor to the side. temperature. hardtop is open.
! To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 2, Close the retractable hardtop.
make sure it is closed before pivoting the sun
visor to the side.
Warning! G The rear window defroster can then be switched
on.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
Vanity mirror removed from the rear window before driv- ! If the rear window defroster switches off too
soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, too
Swing respective sun visor down. ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
many electrical consumers are operating simul-
endangering you and others. taneously and there is insufficient voltage in the
Flip up vanity mirror cover 2 to access
the vanity mirror. battery. The system responds automatically by
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). switching the rear window defroster off.
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on. As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
After using the vanity mirror, flip down Activating rear window defroster automatically switches
vanity mirror cover 2. back on automatically.
Press button F on the automatic cli-
Swing the sun visor up. mate control panel ( page 190).
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.

187
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

188
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Item i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders


for center air vent and side air vents to the
1 Defroster air vents, fixed middle position.
2 Left center air vent, adjustable
3 Cockpit air vent, fixed
4 Right center air vent, adjustable
5 Right side air vent, adjustable
6 Air volume control for right side air
vent
7 Air volume control for center air
vents
8 Air volume control for left side air
vent
9 Automatic climate control panel
a Left side air vent, adjustable

189
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Item The automatic climate control is operation-


al whenever the engine is running. You can
1 Air distribution, left operate the automatic climate control
2 Front defroster system in either the automatic or manual
3 Air recirculation mode. The system cools or heats the
interior depending on the selected interior
4 Rear window defroster temperature and the current outside
5 Air distribution, right temperature.
6 Temperature control, right
Automatic climate control panel 7 Automatic climate control on/off Warning! G
(entire system)
When operating the automatic climate
8 Residual heat/ventilation control, the air that enters the passenger
9 Air volume control compartment through the air vents can be
a AC cooling on/off very hot or very cold (depending on the set
temperature). This may cause burns or frost-
b Temperature control, left bite on unprotected skin in the immediate
area of the air vents. Always keep sufficient
distance between unprotected parts of the
body and the air vents. If necessary, use the
air distribution control ( page 190) to di-
rect the air to air vents in the vehicle interior
that are not in the immediate area of unpro-
tected skin.

190
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and Deactivating the automatic climate
odors are filtered out before outside air en- Warning! G control system
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system. Follow the recommended settings for heat-
ing and cooling given on the following pag- Deactivating
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, Press button ( page 190).
Warning! G impairing visibility and endangering you and
The indicator lamp on the button
others.
Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) comes on.
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the in- Warning! G
A clogged filter will reduce the air volume to terior before driving off. The automatic climate
control will then adjust the interior temperature
the interior and the windows could fog up, When the automatic climate control system
to the set value much faster.
impairing visibility and endangering you and is switched off, the outside air supply and
others. Have a clogged filter replaced as Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow and debris. circulation are also switched off. Only
soon as possible at an authorized choose this setting for a short time when the
Mercedes-Benz Center. When the retractable hardtop is closed, do not
obstruct air flow by placing objects on the air retractable hardtop is closed. Otherwise the
flow-through exhaust slots below the rear win- windows could fog up, impairing visibility
The air conditioning will not engage (no dow. and endangering you and others.
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
( page 198).

191
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Reactivating Operating the automatic climate Air distribution in automatic mode


control system in automatic mode
Press button ( page 190). You can separately adjust the air distribu-
tion for each side of the passenger com-
The indicator lamp on the button goes Air distribution and air volume can be
partment.
out. adjusted automatically by the automatic
The previous settings are in effect climate control system. You can also ad-
Activating
again. just the settings for air distribution and air
volume manually. Press control button 1 or 5
or ( page 190).
i When operating the automatic climate
Turn one of the temperature controls control system in automatic mode, you will only The control button is engaged.
on the automatic climate control panel rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume The U symbol on the control button
( page 190). and air distribution. comes on. Air distribution for the re-
The indicator lamp on button In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is spective side of the passenger com-
goes out. switched on. This function can be switched off if partment is adjusted automatically.
necessary ( page 190).
Deactivating
Press control button 1 or 5
( page 190) once more.
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button
goes out. Automatic air distribution for
the respective side of the passenger
compartment is switched off. Adjust
the air distribution manually
( page 194).

192
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Air volume in automatic mode Setting the temperature Decreasing


The air volume settings are the same for Turn temperature control 6
Use temperature controls 6 and b
the entire passenger compartment. and/or b ( page 190) slightly
( page 190) to separately adjust the air
counterclockwise.
temperature on each side of the passenger
Activating
compartment. You should raise or lower The automatic climate control system
Press control button 9 ( page 190). the temperature setting in small incre- will correspondingly adjust the interior
ments, preferably starting at 72F (22C). air temperature.
The control button is engaged.
The U symbol on the control button The automatic climate control will adjust
comes on. to the set temperature as fast as possible.

Deactivating Increasing
Turn temperature control 6
Press control button 9 ( page 190)
once more. and/or b ( page 190) slightly
clockwise.
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button The automatic climate control system
goes out. Adjust the air volume manu- will correspondingly adjust the interior
ally ( page 195). air temperature.

193
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Adjusting air distribution Turn control button to the desired Closing the cockpit air vent and center
symbol. air vents
Use air distribution controls 1 and 5
The air distribution is adjusted Turn thumbwheel 7 ( page 188)
( page 190) to separately adjust the air
according to the chosen setting. downward.
distribution on each side of the passenger
compartment. The following symbols are i You can also turn the air distribution control Cockpit air vent 3 and center
found on the controls: to a position between two symbols. air vents 2 and 4 ( page 188)
are closed.
Symbol Function Opening the center air vents
h Directs air through the cen- Opening the side air vents
Turn thumbwheel 7 ( page 188)
ter and side air vents upward to the first stop. Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8
j Directs air to the windows ( page 188) upward.
Center air vents 2 and 4
V Directs air into the entire ( page 188) are open. The corresponding side air vent is
vehicle interior open.
Opening the cockpit air vent and center
k Directs air to the footwells
air vents Closing the side air vents
Press control button 1 or 5 Turn thumbwheel 7 ( page 188) up- Turn thumbwheel 6 and 8
( page 190) until the control button ward all the way. ( page 188) upward.
sticks up slightly and the U symbol Cockpit air vent 3 and center The corresponding side air vent is
on the control button is out. air vents 2 and 4 ( page 188) closed.
Automatic air distribution for the are open.
i The air vents are continuously variable.
respective side of the passenger
compartment is switched off.

194
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Adjusting air volume Maximum cooling MAXCOOL Front defroster

Use air volume control 9 ( page 190) for If the left and right air distribution controls You can use this setting to defrost the
both automatic ( page 192) and manual as well as the airflow volume control are windshield, for example if it is iced up.
air volume adjustment. Nine blower set to U and there is a high need for You can also defog the windshield and the
speeds are available. cooling, MAXCOOL is activated. side windows.
MAX COOL appears on the temperature
Press control button 9 ( page 190). i Keep this setting selected only until the
controls 6 and b ( page 190).
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
The control button sticks up slightly.
The U symbol on the control button This provides the fastest possible cooling
goes out. Automatic air volume control of the vehicle interior (when retractable
is switched off. The air volume is ad- hardtop is closed).
justed corresponding to the set blower
speed.

Automatic climate control panel with


MAXCOOL activated

195
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Activating Windshield fogged on the outside Air recirculation mode


Press button P ( page 190). i Keep this setting selected only until the Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
windshield is clear again.
The indicator lamp on the button unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
comes on. Switch the windshield wipers on from the outside. This setting cuts off the
The air conditioning switches to the ( page 58). intake of outside air and recirculates the
following functions automatically: If the automatic air distribution and air vol- air in the passenger compartment.

cooling on to dehumidify ume are switched off:


Turn air distribution controls 1 and 5 Warning! G
maximum blower speed and
heating power ( page 190) to position h or k.
Fogged windows impair visibility, endanger-
air flows onto the windshield or ing you and others. If the windows begin to
and the front side windows Press control buttons 1, 5 and 9 fog on the inside, switching off the air
( page 190). recirculation mode immediately should clear
the air recirculation mode is interior window fogging. If interior window
switched off The control buttons are engaged. fogging persists, make sure the air
The U symbol on the control conditioning ( page 198) is activated, or
Deactivating buttons come on. Air distribution and press button P.
Press button P ( page 190). air volume are adjusted automatically.

The indicator lamp on the button goes


out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are in effect
again.
i The cooling remains switched on.

196
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Activating Deactivating Air recirculation mode with conve-


nience closing or opening feature
Briefly press button , Briefly press button ,
( page 190). ( page 190).
The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button goes Warning! G
comes on. out.
Never operate the windows if there is the
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The manually selected air recirculation possibility of anyone being harmed by the
matically mode is deactivated automatically closing procedure.
at high outside temperatures after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is In the event that the procedure causes po-
if the concentration of carbon monoxide below approximately 41F (5C) tential danger, the closing of the windows
(CO) and/or nitrogen oxide (NOx) in the out- after 5 minutes if the air conditioning is can be immediately halted by releasing
side air increases, for example in a tunnel turned off the , button or by pressing and pulling
The indicator lamp on button , is not lit when after 30 minutes if the outside temperature the respective window switch.
the air recirculation mode is automatically is above approximately 41F (5C)
switched on.
At outside temperatures above 79F Activating
A quantity of outside air is added after approxi- (26C) the system will not automatically
mately 30 minutes. Press and hold button ,.
switch back to outside air.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air recirculation mode is
activated. The windows will close.

197
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Deactivating Air conditioning Deactivating


Press and hold button ,. It is possible to deactivate the cooling
The air conditioning (cooling) function is
function of the automatic climate control
The indicator lamp on the button goes operational when the engine is running and
system. The air in the vehicle will then no
out. The air recirculation mode is deac- cools the vehicle interior down to the
longer be cooled or dehumidified.
tivated. The windows will return to their selected temperature. In addition, the
previous position. cooling function dehumidifies the air in Press button 2 ( page 190).
the vehicle interior, thus preventing the The indicator lamp on the button goes
i A window will only return to its previous windows from fogging up.
position if it has not moved to another position out. The cooling function switches off
using the respective window switch after it was i Condensation may drip out from underneath after a short delay.
closed with button ,. the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
of a malfunction.

Warning! G
If you turn off the cooling function, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog
up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.

198
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Activating Residual heat and ventilation Activating


Moist air can fog up the windows. You can With the SmartKey:
With the engine switched off, it is possible
dehumidify the air with the air condition-
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
ing.
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes to position 1 or 0, or remove it from
Press button 2 once more use of the residual heat produced by the the starter switch.
( page 190). engine. Press button T ( page 190).
The indicator lamp on the button i How long the system will provide heating The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. depends on the coolant temperature and the comes on.
selected temperature. The blower will run at low
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
speed regardless of the air distribution control With KEYLESS-GO*:
R134A. This refrigerant is free of CFCs setting.
which are harmful to the ozone layer. Turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
! If the 2 button on the automatic climate open the drivers door (with the drivers
control panel starts to flash, this indicates that
door open, the starter switch is in posi-
the air conditioning is losing refrigerant. The
compressor has turned off. The air conditioning tion 0, same as with the SmartKey re-
cannot be turned on again. moved from the starter switch)
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest Press button T ( page 190).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.

199
Controls in detail
Automatic climate control

Deactivating Ventilated glove box Opening the air vent


Press button T ( page 190). Make sure the air vent in the glove box
The glove box has its own air vents that
is unobstructed.
The indicator lamp on the button goes allow for cooling ventilation when the auto-
out. matic climate control system is activated. Turn thumbwheel 1 upwards.
The residual heat is automatically turned
off: Closing the air vent
Turn thumbwheel 1 downwards.
when the ignition is switched on
after about 30 minutes
if the battery voltage drops

Glove box
1 Thumbwheel
2 Air vent
i You should keep air vent 2 closed when
outside temperatures are low.

200
Controls in detail
Power windows
Power windows
Opening and closing the windows
The closing of the door windows can be im- holding button , on the automatic
mediately halted by releasing the switch or, climate control panel, the automatic
The windows are opened and closed elec-
if the switch was pulled past the resistance reversal function will not operate.
trically. The switches for all the windows
point and released, by either pressing or When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
are on the drivers door. The switch for the
pulling the respective switch. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
passenger side windows is on the passen-
ger door. The closing of the rear side windows can be from the starter switch, take it with you, and
immediately halted by releasing the switch. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
If a door window encounters an obstruction unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
that blocks its path in a circumstance where an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised
you pulled the switch past the resistance access to a vehicle could result in an
point and released it to close the door win- accident and/or serious personal injury.
dow, the automatic reversal function will
stop the door window and open it slightly. i Depending on the current position, the win-
dows may also open or close when the air recir-
If the door window encounters an obstruc- culation button , on the control panel of the
tion that blocks its path in a circumstance automatic climate control ( page 196) is
where you are closing the door window by pressed and held.
1 Left door and rear side windows
pulling and holding the switch, by pressing
2 Right door and rear side windows i After switching off the ignition ( page 40)
and holding button on the SmartKey,
or removing the SmartKey from the starter
by pressing and holding the lock button
Warning! G (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on an outside
switch, the windows can be operated
until you open a door
door handle, by pressing and holding the re-
When closing the windows, make sure that tractable hardtop switch, or by pressing and for at least 5 minutes if no door was opened
there is no danger of anyone being injured
Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
by the closing procedure.

201
Controls in detail
Power windows

Opening the door windows Closing the door windows Fully opening the door windows
(Express-open)
Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance Pull switch 1 or 2 to the resistance
point. point. Press switch 1 or 2 past the resis-
tance point and release.
The corresponding door window will The corresponding door window will
move downwards until you release the move upwards until you release the The corresponding door window opens
switch. switch. completely.
i If the hardtop is open, the respective rear i If the hardtop is open, the respective rear
side window will also open automatically. Warning! G side window will also open automatically.

Opening the rear side windows when If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
the hardtop is closed: ing the door window, and upward movement
of the door window is blocked by some ob-
Open the door window.
struction including but not limited to arms,
Press switch 1 or 2 to the resistance hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal
point again. will not operate.
The corresponding rear side window
will open completely. Closing the rear side windows if the
hardtop is closed:
Close the door window.
Pull and hold switch 1 or 2.
The corresponding rear side window
will move upwards until you release the
switch.

202
Controls in detail
Power windows

Fully closing the door windows Closing the windows with Synchronizing power windows
(Express-close) KEYLESS-GO*
The power windows must be synchronized
Pull switch 1 or 2 past the resis- Press and hold lock button on an out-
each time
tance point and release. side door handle ( page 66) until the
windows are closed. after the battery has been dis-
The corresponding door window closes
connected
completely.
If the upward movement of the door win- Warning! G if the power windows cannot be fully
opened (Express-open) or closed
dow is blocked during the closing proce-
When closing the windows make sure that (Express-close)
dure, the door window will stop and open
there is no danger of anyone being harmed
slightly.
by the closing procedure. Synchronizing the power windows
The windows will not automatically re-open Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
Warning! G if blocked during convenience closing.
Pull the power window switches until
Drivers door only: If potential danger exists, proceed as the side windows are closed.
If within 5 seconds the switch is again follows:
Hold the switches for approximately
pulled past the resistance point and Release the lock button. 1 second.
released, the automatic reversal will not
Pull on the door handle and hold firmly.
operate. The power windows are synchronized.
The side windows open for as long as
the door handle is held but the door not
Stopping windows opened.

Press or pull the respective switch


again.

203
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Opening and closing the retractable


hardtop
Shortly before the retractable hardtop is
lowered, a warning will sound and in the left
Warning! G
multifunction display you will see K, in Before operating the retractable hardtop,
For safety reasons, the retractable hardtop
the right multifunction display you will see make sure there is no danger of anyone
can only be opened and closed when the
the message Retractable Roof being injured by the moving parts (retract-
vehicle is standing still.
Lowering. able roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to in-

G
Lock the retractable hardtop again before attention.
Warning! driving any further ( page 207). Otherwise, Hands must never be placed near the roof
the unlocked hardtop could open while the frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
To prevent possible accidents, only drive the
vehicle is in motion and cause you to lose behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the re-
vehicle with the retractable hardtop either
control of the vehicle. You or others could tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.
completely closed and locked, or fully low-
be injured as a result. Serious personal injury may occur.
ered into its storage compartment.
If the retractable hardtop does not com- If potential danger exists, release the re-
pletely open or close, the roof hydraulics will tractable hardtop switch. This immediately
lose pressure and the retractable hardtop is interrupts the raising or lowering procedure.
lowered You then can operate the retractable
hardtop switch or press
after approximately 7 minutes when the
button or on the SmartKey or
ignition is switched on
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to raise or
after approximately 15 seconds when lower the retractable hardtop away from the
the ignition is switched off
danger zone.

204
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

! When opening and closing the retractable Opening/closing with retractable


Warning! G roof, make sure hardtop switch
there is sufficient clearance for the retract-
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
able hardtop to move up and for the trunk lid
to move back
Warning! G
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
the luggage cover is installed, extended and Before operating the retractable hardtop,
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children closed make sure there is no danger of anyone
unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
the trunk is loaded only to the height of the being injured by the moving parts (retract-
an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised luggage cover able roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to in-
access to a vehicle could result in an
luggage/cargo does not push up the closed attention.
accident and/or serious personal injury.
luggage cover
Hands must never be placed near the roof
the trunk lid is closed frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
! Never sit or place heavy objects on the the outside temperature is above +5F behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the re-
rear shelf. Doing so could cause damage to the
(15C) tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.
retractable hardtop and the rear shelf.
the roof is dry and clean when opening Serious personal injury may occur.
! Please keep in mind that weather conditions Otherwise the retractable hardtop and trunk If potential danger exists, release retract-
can sometimes change rapidly. Make sure to
as well as other parts of the vehicle could be able hardtop switch immediately. This im-
close the retractable hardtop when leaving the
damaged. mediately interrupts the raising or lowering
vehicle. If water enters the vehicle interior,
vehicle electronics could be damaged which is procedure.
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.

205
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

The retractable hardtop switch is located Opening Opening/closing with the SmartKey
on the lower part of the center console.
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry be-
fore you open it. Otherwise water may enter the Warning! G
trunk interior.
Before operating the retractable hardtop,
Pull up on the retractable hardtop
make sure there is no danger of anyone
switch as indicated by arrow 1 until
being injured by the moving parts (retract-
the retractable hardtop is completely
able roof, roof frame, and trunk lid) due to in-
lowered into its trunk storage compart-
attention.
ment.
Hands must never be placed near the roof
The multifunction display will briefly
frame, upper windshield area, hardtop, shelf
show the message K Retractable
Retractable hardtop switch behind roll bars, or trunk lid while the re-
Roof In Operation.
tractable hardtop is being raised or lowered.
1 Opening Serious personal injury may occur.
2 Closing Closing
If potential danger exists, release the
Engage the parking brake ( page 55). Press down on the retractable hardtop
respective button on the SmartKey. This
switch as indicated by arrow 2 until
Close the luggage cover, see Luggage immediately interrupts the raising or lower-
the retractable hardtop is completely
cover ( page 210). ing procedure. You then can press
closed and locked.
button or to raise or lower the
Close the trunk lid. The multifunction display will briefly hardtop away from the danger zone.
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). show the message K Retractable
Roof In Operation.

206
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Press and hold button until the Locking the retractable hardtop after
retractable hardtop is completely raising/lowering
open.
The seat ventilation* for the drivers Warning! G
seat switches on. The rear side win-
dows open. The hardtop is not fully closed and locked or
not fully opened and locked if
Release button to interrupt pro-
cedure. the message K Retractable Roof
In Operation appears in the multi-
Closing (Convenience feature) function display
Engage the parking brake ( page 55).
a warning sounds for 10 seconds when
Close the luggage cover, see Luggage Aim the transmitter eye at the outside
driving off or while driving
cover ( page 210). door handle.
Close the trunk lid. The SmartKey must be in close proxim- If the retractable hardtop is not properly
ity to the outside door handle. locked, lock it as follows.
Opening (Summer opening feature) Press and hold button until the
i Make sure the retractable hardtop is dry be- retractable hardtop is completely
fore you open it. Otherwise water may enter the closed.
trunk interior. The retractable hardtop and the rear
Aim the transmitter eye at an outside side windows close.
door handle.
The SmartKey must be in close proxim-
ity to the outside door handle.

207
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Unlocked status noticed when stopped Unlocked status noticed while driving Problems when operating the
retractable hardtop
Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
To lock the retractable hardtop in its Warning! G Several conditions may cause the retract-
able hardtop to not open, close, or lock
fully closed position, press retractable
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon properly:
hardtop switch forward ( page 205).
as it is safe to do so and lock the hardtop be-
The luggage cover in the trunk is not
or: fore continuing to drive. You could other-
closed.
To lock the retractable hardtop in its wise endanger yourself and others.
Close the luggage cover in the
fully opened position, pull up on the re-
tractable hardtop switch ( page 205). trunk.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
soon as it is safe to do so. The trunk lid is open.
Leave the ignition switched on. Close the trunk lid.
To lock the retractable hardtop in its The battery voltage is too low.
fully closed position, press retractable
Start engine and let run while open-
hardtop switch forward ( page 205).
ing/closing the retractable hard-
or: top.
To lock the retractable hardtop in its
fully opened position, pull up on the re-
tractable hardtop switch ( page 205).

208
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

The hardtop drive system was shut Wind screen


down for safety reasons after multiple,
consecutive attempts to raise or lower
the hardtop. After about 10 minutes
Warning! G
you can open or close the retractable The wind screen can restrict the drivers vi-
hardtop. sion to the rear of the vehicle. To prevent a
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). possible accident when visibility is limited
(e.g. in darkness), the upper part of the wind
Repeat the opening or closing
screen should be folded back.
procedure.
If the retractable hardtop still does 1 Guide tabs
The wind screen deflects drafts away from
not open, close, or lock properly, the driver and passenger when the retract- Slide the wind screen into the roll bar
have the retractable hardtop sys- able hardtop is lowered. It is stored in the until guide taps 1 on each side latch
tem checked at an authorized trunk. underneath the roll bar.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Make sure the fastening straps do not
There is a malfunction in the retract- Installing get caught.
able hardtop system.
Leave the wind screen folded and place Adjust the roll bar to a height
Contact an authorized it on the roll bar. ( page 83) that allows you to reach
Mercedes-Benz Center. easily underneath it.

209
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Removing Lower the roll bar ( page 83).


Fold the upper section of the wind Make sure the fastening straps do not
screen back. get caught.
Adjust the roll bar to a height Pull the wind screen out towards the
( page 83) that allows you to reach front of the vehicle.
easily underneath it. Be careful not to damage interior trim
with the guide tabs.
Store the wind screen in a safe place.
2 Buckle
Luggage cover
Guide the fastening straps around the
top of the roll bar and close buckles 2. The luggage cover covers luggage/cargo
in the trunk.
Tighten the fastening straps if neces-
sary. ! To prevent damage to the retractable hard-
top or luggage/cargo when lowering:
Lower the roll bar ( page 83).
1 Release button Load trunk only to the height of the luggage
Fold the upper section of the wind cover.
screen up towards the head restraints Undo the buckles on the upper section
Do not permit luggage/cargo to push up the
until it stops. of the roll bar by pressing release closed luggage cover.
button 1.
Do not load anything on top of or in front of
the luggage cover.
Do not place anything on the shelf behind
the roll bar.

210
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Closing luggage cover Opening luggage cover Completely open zipper 2 while the
luggage cover is closed.
Unhook luggage cover 1 from side
holders 3. Open luggage cover 1 see Opening
luggage cover ( page 211).
While holding on to handle 4, guide
luggage cover 1 in the opposite The tensioning clasps are on the left and
direction of arrow. right sides of the trunk.

Removing luggage cover

Closed luggage cover


1 Luggage cover
2 Zipper
3 Side holder
4 Handle
Pull out luggage cover 1 in direction of Opened luggage cover
arrow using handle 4.
5 Tensioning clasp
Hook luggage cover 1 into left and Closed luggage cover 6 Retainer spring
right side holders 3. 1 Luggage cover
2 Zipper
3 Side holder
4 Handle
Fold back the entire length of the
zippers cloth cover.

211
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Installing luggage cover


Warning! G
! Before installing the luggage cover, make
Only open the tensioning clasps when the sure that the cloth end is in front of the cloth
holder. Otherwise, it could be damaged.
luggage cover opened, see Opening lug-
gage cover ( page 211). Carefully place luggage cover in trunk.
You could otherwise be injured.

Open tensioning clasps 5 by pulling


them downward.
7 Luggage cover
Unhook retainer springs 6 from hold- 8 Cloth end
ers and flip retainer springs all the way 9 Cloth holder
up.
Carefully tilt luggage cover 7 in direc-
tion of arrow towards rear of trunk.
Roll up front end of cloth 8 in the 1 Luggage cover
trunk towards the front and fasten it in 2 Hook
place in front of cloth holder 9. 3 Guide rail
Completely remove luggage cover 7 Insert luggage cover 1 into guide
from the trunk. rails 3 on both sides using hooks 2.
Tilt luggage cover forward in direction
of arrow.

212
Controls in detail
Retractable hardtop

Fold retainer springs of tensioning Sunshade for panorama roof* Opening


clasps downward and clip them into The sunshade protects you from excessive Squeeze stop buttons 1 and guide the
holders on both sides ( page 211). sunlight coming in through the panorama sunshade towards the rear.
Close tensioning clasps on both sides roof.
by pressing them upward. Closing
Pull handle of luggage cover towards Warning! G Using handle 2, slide the sunshade
the rear. towards the front of the vehicle.
Do not operate the sunshade while driving.
Clip eyelets onto side trim panels.
Adjusting the sunshade while driving could
Close the zipper completely cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-
( page 211). cle.
Fold back the zippers cloth cover
across the entire length of the luggage
cover.

1 Stop buttons
2 Handle

213
Controls in detail
Driving systems

The driving systems of your vehicle are Cruise control


described on the following pages: Warning! G
The cruise control automatically maintains
Cruise control and Distronic*, with
the speed you set for your vehicle. The cruise control is a convenience system
which the vehicle can maintain a preset designed to assist the driver during vehicle
speed The use of the cruise control is recom-
operation. The driver is and must always
mended for driving at a constant speed for
Distance warning function* (only avail- remain responsible for the vehicles speed
extended periods of time.
able with Distronic*), which warns of and for safe brake operation.
stationary objects or slower moving ve- You can set or resume the cruise control at Only use the cruise control if the road,
hicles that you are closing in on too any speed above 20 mph (30 km/h). traffic, and weather conditions make it ad-
quickly The cruise control function is operated by visable to travel at a constant speed.
ABC with vehicle level control systems, means of the cruise control lever. The use of the cruise control can be dan-
with which you can change vehicle sus- The cruise control lever is the uppermost gerous on winding roads or in heavy traf-
pension characteristics lever on the left-hand side of the steering fic because conditions do not allow safe
column ( page 24). driving at a constant speed.
Parktronic*, which assists the driver
during parking maneuvers The use of the cruise control can be dan-
gerous on slippery roads. Rapid changes
For information on the BAS, ABS, ESP, in tire traction can result in wheel spin
and the electro-hydraulic brake system, and loss of control.
see Driving safety systems ( page 89). Deactivate the cruise control when driv-
ing in fog.
The Resume function should only be oper-
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ-
ously set speed and wishes to resume this
particular preset speed.

214
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating cruise control Remove your foot from the accelerator


Warning! G You can activate the cruise control when pedal.

The cruise control brakes automatically so the vehicle speed is above The cruise control is activated.
that the set speed is not exceeded. 20 mph (30 km/h).
The currently set speed appears in the
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a con- In the following cases you cannot activate status indicator of the multifunction
venience system designed to assist the driv- the cruise control: display:
er during vehicle operation. The driver is and when you brake USA only:
must always remain responsible for the ve- CRUISE XXX MPH
when you have set the parking brake
hicles speed and for safe brake operation.
Canada only:
when the gear selector lever is set to
XXX Km/h
position P, R, or N
when the ESP is switched off i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not
be able to maintain the set speed. Once the
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom- grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
the cruise control system. the set speed by braking with the vehicles brake
system. In addition, on longer downhill grades
Setting current speed the automatic transmission will downshift auto-
matically.
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
1 Setting current or higher speed Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
2 Setting current or lower speed direction of arrow 1 or depress in
3 Canceling the cruise control direction of arrow 2.
4 Activating the cruise control or resum-
The current speed is set.
ing to last set speed

215
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Canceling the cruise control i The cruise control switches off auto- ! Moving the gear selector lever to position N
matically when while driving cancels the cruise control.
There are several ways to cancel the cruise
you step on the brake pedal However, the gear selector lever should not be
control: moved to position N while driving except to
you depress the parking brake pedal coast when the vehicle is in danger of skidding
Step on the brake pedal.
The cruise control also switches off auto- (e.g. on icy roads).
The cruise control is canceled. The last matically when
set speed is stored for later use. i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
the vehicle speed is below deactivate the cruise control. After brief acceler-
or 20 mph (30 km/h) ( page 214) ation (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will re-
Briefly push the cruise control lever in the ESP is in operation or switched off with sume the last speed set.
the ESP switch ( page 93)
direction of arrow 3.
you move the gear selector lever to
The cruise control is canceled. The last position N while driving
set speed is stored for later use.
An acoustic warning sounds and the message
i The last stored speed is canceled when you CC Off appears in the multifunction display for
turn off the engine. approximately 5 seconds.

216
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting a higher speed Fine adjustment in 1 mph Setting to last stored speed
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments (Resume function)
Lift the cruise control lever in direction
of arrow 1 ( page 215) and hold it
there until the desired speed is
Faster
Warning! G
reached. Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow 1 ( page 215). The set speed stored in memory should only
Release the cruise control lever.
be set again if prevailing road conditions
The new speed is set. Slower permit. Possible acceleration or decelera-
tion differences arising from returning to the
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
Setting a lower speed preset speed could cause an accident
direction of arrow 2 ( page 215).
Depress the cruise control lever in and/or serious injury to you and others.
direction of arrow 2 ( page 215) and
hold it there until the desired speed is Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
reached. direction of arrow 4 ( page 215).
Release the cruise control lever. The cruise control resumes to the last
set speed or, if no speed is stored, it
The new speed is set.
will set and store the current speed.
i When you use the cruise control lever to de- Remove your foot from the accelerator
celerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engines braking power pedal.
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. The selected speed appears in the mul-
tifunction display.

217
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic*
Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
of the vehicles braking power.
Warning! G
When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases the driving It is the drivers responsibility at all times to Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
convenience afforded by the cruise control be attentive to the road, weather and traffic tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
while traveling on expressways and other conditions. In addition, the driver must pro- mend that you review the following
major roadways. vide the steering, braking and other driving information carefully before operating the
inputs necessary to remain in control of the system.
If the Distronic distance sensor detects
vehicle.
a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
your vehicles speed will be reduced so
Warning! G
that you follow that vehicle at the pre-
set following distance.
Warning! G
Distronic cannot take street and traffic con-
If there is no vehicle directly ahead of Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed ditions into account. Only use Distronic if
you, Distronic will function in the same adjustment reduction capability is intended the road, weather and traffic conditions
way as standard cruise control to make cruise control more effective and make it advisable to travel at a constant
( page 214). usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not speed.
however, intended to, nor does it, replace

Warning! G the need for extreme care.


The responsibility for the vehicles speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a
importantly, brake operation to assure a
substitute for active driving involvement. It
safe stopping distance, always remains with
does not react to pedestrians or stationary
the driver.
objects, recognize or predict the lane curva-
ture nor the movement of preceding
vehicles.

218
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G


Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip- Distronic cannot take weather conditions Close attention to road and traffic condi-
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction into account. Switch off Distronic or do not tions is imperative at all times, regardless of
can result in wheel spin and loss of control. switch it on if: whether or not Distronic is activated.
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight roads are slippery or covered with snow Use of Distronic can be dangerous on wind-
distance conditions. Do not use Distronic or ice ing roads or in heavy traffic because condi-
during conditions of fog, heavy rain, snow or The wheels could lose traction while tions do not allow safe driving at a constant
sleet. braking or accelerating and the vehicle speed.
could skid. Distronic will not react to stationary objects
the sensor is dirty or visibility is dimin- on the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
ished due to snow, rain or fog for exam- traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
ple will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
The distance control system functional-
ity could be impaired.
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
conditions even while Distronic is switched
on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recog-
nize dangerous situations until it is too late.
This could cause an accident in which you
and/or others could be injured.

219
Controls in detail
Driving systems

i USA only: Distronic displays in the speedometer


Switch off Distronic:
This device has been approved by the FCC as a dial
when changing from the left to the right Vehicular Radar System. The radar sensor is
lane if vehicles are moving more slowly intended for use in an automotive radar system
in the left lane only. Removal, tampering, or altering of the de-
when entering a turn lane or highway off vice will void any warranties, and is not permitted
ramp by the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
in complex driving situations, such as in
Any unauthorized modification to this device
highway construction zones
could void the users authority to operate the
In these situations, Distronic will continue to equipment.
maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
i Canada only:
Distronic is designed and intended only to This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
maintain a set speed and keep a set dis- Canada. Operation is subject to the following
tance from moving objects in front of your two conditions:
vehicle. (1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may 1 Red distance warning lamp E
Warning! G cause undesired operation of the device. 2 Set speed
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will
The Resume function should only be oper- When Distronic is activated, distance
void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not
ated if the driver is fully aware of the previ- tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved warning lamp 1 and the set speed 2
ously set speed and wishes to resume this way. appear in the speedometer dial.
particular preset speed. Any unauthorized modification to this device i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom-
could void the users authority to operate the eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for
equipment. the Distronic.

220
Controls in detail
Driving systems

If Distronic detects a vehicle directly


ahead, the Distronic indicator lamp E Warning! G Warning! G
in the speedometer dial comes on white.
An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi-
If Distronic calculates that there is a dan- distance warning lamp (red) E in the mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This
ger of collision: speedometer dial is illuminated if the corresponds to about 20% of the maximum
The distance warning lamp E in the Distronic system calculates that the deceleration ability of your vehicle.
speedometer comes on red. distance to the vehicle ahead and your Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
vehicles current speed indicate that restore the preset distance or to maintain
An intermittent warning sounds.
Distronic will not be capable of slowing the the set speed.
Immediately apply the brake to avoid a vehicle sufficiently to maintain the preset
collision. following distance, which creates a danger
Under no circumstances should the of a collision.
driver await the intermittent warning Immediately brake the vehicle to increase
sound before braking. See the follow- the distance to the preceding vehicle. The
ing warning note. warning sound is intended as a final caution
that you have not interceded with your own
The intermittent warning sound ceases
braking inputs to avoid a potentially danger-
and the red distance warning
ous situation. Do not wait for the operation
lamp E goes out when the neces-
of the warning signal to intercede with your
sary distance to the vehicle ahead is
own braking, as that will result in potentially
established again.
dangerous emergency braking which will
not always result in an impact being
avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

221
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Distronic menu in the control system Distronic deactivated Distronic activated


Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the When Distronic is deactivated, you will see When Distronic is activated, the
current settings for your Distronic system. the standard display in the left multifunc- DTR symbol and the set speed appear
The information shown in the multifunction tion display. in the left multifunction display.
display depends on whether the Distronic
system is activated ( page 223) or
deactivated ( page 225).
i For information on the distance warning
function*, see Distance warning function*
( page 229).
Press button or repeatedly 1 Preceding vehicle, if detected 1 Symbol for activated Distronic
until you see one of the following 2 Actual distance to preceding vehicle 2 Set speed
displays in the multifunction display. 3 Preset distance threshold to preceding
vehicle
4 Your vehicle
5 Symbol for activated distance warning
function

222
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Cruise control lever Activating Distronic


The Distronic system is operated by means You can activate Distronic when the vehi-
of the cruise control lever. cle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h)
and 110 mph (180 km/h).
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever found on the left-hand side of the When Distronic is activated, the left multi-
steering column. function display will show a message such
as DTR 55 MPH.
If Distronic is not activated after the cruise
control lever is pulled, the left multifunc-
tion display will show the message
DTR --- MPH.
In the following cases you cannot activate
Distronic:
up to 2 minutes after starting the 1 White Distronic indicator lamp E
engine 2 Set speed
1 Setting current or higher speed
2 Setting current or lower speed
when you brake i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom-
eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for
3 Deactivate Distronic when you have set the parking brake the Distronic.
4 Activating Distronic or resuming at last when the gear selector lever is set to
set speed position P, R, or N.
when the ESP is switched off

223
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting the current speed i If you do not take your foot off of the accel- Setting a lower speed
erator but continue to accelerate past the set
Accelerate or decelerate to the desired Briefly tip the cruise control lever in
speed, the following message will appear in the
speed. multifunction display: direction of arrow 2 ( page 223) to
decrease the vehicle speed in incre-
Briefly lift the cruise control lever in DTR Passive.
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
direction of arrow 1 or depress in The distance to slower moving vehicles in front
direction of arrow 2 ( page 223). of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will The new speed is set.
Distronic is activated and the current then be determined only by the accelerator
pedal position. i When you use the cruise control lever to
speed is set. decelerate, the brakes will be applied to support
deceleration.
The currently set speed appears in the Setting a higher speed
status indicator of the multifunction In addition, the transmission will automatically
Briefly tip the cruise control lever in downshift on long downhill grades.
display:
direction of arrow 1 ( page 223) to
USA only: increase the vehicle speed in incre- Fine adjustment in 1 mph
DTR XXX MPH ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). (Canada: 1 km/h) increments
Canada only: The new speed is set.
DTR XXX Km/h Faster
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
Remove your foot from the accelerator deactivate Distronic. After brief acceleration
pedal. (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will resume direction of arrow 4 ( page 223).
the last speed set.

224
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Setting to last stored speed Deactivating Distronic i Distronic deactivates automatically when
(Resume function) There are several ways to deactivate the you depress the parking brake pedal
Distronic system: the vehicle speed is below
Warning! G Step on the brake pedal. 20 mph (30 km/h) ( page 223)
the ESP is in operation or switched off with
The set speed stored in memory should only or the ESP switch ( page 93)
be set again if prevailing road conditions Briefly push the cruise control lever in you move the gear selector lever into
permit. Possible acceleration or decelera- direction of arrow 3 ( page 223). position N
tion differences arising from returning to the
Distronic will be deactivated. The last set An acoustic warning sounds and the
preset speed could caused an accident message DTR Off appears in the multifunc-
and/or serious injury to you and others. speed will be stored into memory.
tion display for approximately 5 seconds.
The following message appears in the mul-
tifunction display for approximately
Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
5 seconds: DTR Off
Warning! G
direction of arrow 4 ( page 223).
Distronic resumes the last stored i The last stored set speed is deleted when Distronic switches off and releases the
speed or, if no speed is stored, it will the engine is turned off. brakes when the vehicle decelerates below
set and store the current speed. the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h)
by operation of the system. At that time the
Remove your foot from the accelerator
driver must apply the brakes in order to
pedal.
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a
stop.

225
Controls in detail
Driving systems

! Moving the gear selector lever to position N Increasing distance


while driving cancels the Distronic. However, the Warning! G Increasing the distance setting tells
gear selector lever should not be moved to
position N while driving except to coast when It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to Distronic to maintain a greater following
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy select the appropriate setting given road distance to the preceding vehicle.
roads). conditions, traffic, drivers preferred driving Turn thumbwheel 1 towards .
style and applicable laws and driving recom-
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not
deactivate the Distronic. After brief acceleration mendations for safe following distance. Decreasing distance
(e.g. for passing), the Distronic will resume the
Decreasing the distance setting tells
last speed set.
Distronic to maintain a shorter following
distance to the preceding vehicle.
Setting the following distance in
Distronic Turn thumbwheel 1 towards .
You can set the specified following dis-
tance for Distronic by varying the time set-
ting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using
this time setting and the current speed of
your vehicle, Distronic calculates and sets
the required following distance to the
preceding vehicle. The set distance will 1 Thumbwheel for setting following
appear in the right multifunction display distance
( page 222).
The distance setting thumbwheel for the
time setting is located on the lower section
of the center console.

226
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Driving with Distronic The most likely cause for a malfunctioning


Distronic regulates only the distance be-
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
This section describes a number of driving tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
the hood grille), especially at times of snow
situations where special precaution is of it, but does not register stationary objects
and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
required on the part of the driver. in the road, e.g.:
Distronic will switch off, and the message
Be prepared to brake in such situations. a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam DISTRONIC Currently Unavailable See
This will deactivate the Distronic system.
a disabled vehicle Oper. Manual appears in the multifunction
an oncoming vehicle display.
Warning! G
The driver must always be alert, observe all i If the message DISTRONIC Currently
Distronic works to maintain the speed se- traffic and intercede as required by means Unavailable See Oper. Manual disappears
of steering or braking the vehicle. from the multifunction display during driving, the
lected by the driver unless a moving obsta-
dirt (e.g. slush) has dissolved. Distronic is avail-
cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the able again if you reactivate it ( page 223).
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at your Warning! G For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
set distance. This means that: sor, see Cleaning the Distronic* system
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy sensor cover ( page 336).
Your vehicle can pass another vehicle road conditions.
after you have changed lanes.
While in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could
lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your
vehicle could then accelerate to the pre-
viously set speed.

227
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Turns and bends Offset driving Lane changing

In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
to brake late or unexpectedly. cient distance to the vehicle ahead.

228
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Narrow vehicles Distance warning function*


Warning! G
When Distronic* is deactivated, this func-
tion will continue to warn you when recog- If the distance warning lamp (red) E in
nizing a stationary obstacle or a slower the speedometer comes on while driving
vehicle moving in your vehicles path and and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
the danger of a collision exists: immediate attention on part of the driver is
required.
The distance warning lamp E in the
speedometer comes on red. As required by the traffic situation, apply the
brakes and navigate around a possible ob-
An intermittent warning will sound if stacle. However, do not drive by relying on
Because of their narrow profile, the vehi- necessary. the distance warning function, as this will
cles traveling near the outer edges of the If these warnings are issued, you must result in an emergency braking application.
lane have not yet been detected by brake manually to maintain a safe distance This will not always enable you to avoid a
Distronic. There will be insufficient dis- and avoid a collision with the preceding collision, especially when traveling on vary-
tance to the vehicles ahead. vehicle. ing road surface conditions and with varying
driver reaction.
When depressing the brake pedal, the
warning sound ceases. The warning sound
will also cease when the distance to the i Complex driving situations are not always
preceding vehicle is sufficient again with- fully recognized by the distance warning
out applying the brakes. In this case, the function. This could result in wrong or missing
distance warning lamp will also go out. distance warnings.

229
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Activating Active Body Control (ABC)


Press switch 1.
The ABC system is an active,
The indicator lamp on the switch computer-controlled system that hydrauli-
comes on. A loudspeaker symbol cally adjusts the suspension at all four
appears in the right multifunction wheels in response to various driving
display ( page 222). situations. It automatically selects the
optimum suspension tuning and ride
Deactivating height for your vehicle.
Press switch 1 once more.
1 Distance warning function switch Vehicle level control
The indicator lamp on the switch goes
out. No loudspeaker symbol appears in
the right multifunction display. Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, keep hands
and feet away from wheel housing area, and
stay away from under the vehicle when low-
ering the vehicle chassis.

Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride


height to:
increase vehicle safety
reduce fuel consumption

230
Controls in detail
Driving systems

The vehicle chassis ride height is raised or The following vehicle level settings can be i The selected vehicle level setting remains
lowered according to the selected level selected when the vehicle is stationary: stored in memory, even if the engine is turned off
setting and to the vehicle speed: and restarted.
Vehicle Use for Indicator
With increasing speed, ride height is The ABC vehicle level control button with
level lamps
reduced by up to approximately the indicator lamps is located in the lower
0.5 inch (12 mm). Normal For driving on nor- Both section of the center console.
mal roads. lamps off
With decreasing speed, the ride height
is again raised to the selected vehicle Level 1 For driving on One
level. rough roads or with lamp on
snow chains
i These height adjustments are so small that ( page 329).
you may not notice any change.
Level 2 For driving on very Both
rough road surface lamps on
conditions.

Select the level 1 and level 2 settings only 1 Indicator lamp


when required by current driving condi- 2 Indicator lamp
tions. Otherwise: 3 ABC vehicle level control button
Fuel consumption may increase.
Handling may be impaired.

231
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Start the engine ( page 53). Suspension tuning The ABC suspension tuning button with the
Briefly press button 3 to change from The suspension tuning is set according to: indicator lamp is located in the lower sec-
one level setting to the next. tion of the center console.
Your driving style
The normal level is selected if both
Road surface conditions
indicator lamps are off.
The vehicle loading
At level 1, indicator lamp 1 is on.
Your choice of suspension style
At level 2, both indicator lamps are
on. You can set the following suspension
styles:
When the vehicle is at level 2, pressing
the button will return the vehicle to nor- Regular (Comfort)
mal level. Sporty
1 ABC suspension tuning button
i Pressing the button twice in quick succes- i The selected setting is stored, even if the en- 2 Indicator lamp
sion will cause the vehicle to immediately raise gine is turned off.
or lower to the new vehicle level as selected. Start the engine ( page 53).

232
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Suspension for sporty driving style Parktronic system* (Parking assist)


The setting for sporty driving is selected
Warning! G
when indicator lamp 2 is on.
Warning! G Make sure no persons or animals are in the
Press button 1. area in which you are maneuvering. Other-
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is wise you run the risk of causing injury.
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
not intended to, nor does it replace, the
need for extreme care. The responsibility
Suspension for regular driving style ! Interference caused by other ultrasonic sig-
during parking and other critical maneuvers nals (e.g. working jackhammers, car wash, or the
The setting for regular driving is selected always remains with the driver. air brakes of trucks) can cause the system to
when indicator lamp 2 is off. send erratic indications, and should be taken
Special attention must be paid to objects
Press button 1. into consideration.
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. (e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road The Parktronic system is an electronic aid
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by with ultrasonic sensors. It is designed to
the system and can damage the vehicle. assist the driver during parking maneu-
The operational function of the Parktronic vers. It visually and audibly indicates the
system can be affected by dirty sensors, es- relative distance between the vehicle and
pecially at times of snow and ice. See an obstacle.
Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors The Parktronic system is automatically
( page 337). activated when you switch on the ignition,
release the parking brake, or place the
gear selector lever in position D, R, or N.

233
Controls in detail
Driving systems

The Parktronic system deactivates at i To function properly, the sensors must be Front sensors
speeds exceeding approximately free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
11 mph (18 km/h). At lower vehicle sensors regularly, being careful not to scratch or Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
speeds the Parktronic system turns on damage the sensors, see Cleaning the
Parktronic system* sensors ( page 337).
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
again. The Parktronic system also deacti-
vates when you place the gear selector le- Rear sensors
ver in position P or depress the parking Range of the sensors
brake pedal. Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
The Parktronic system monitors the sur- Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
roundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the
rear bumper. ! During parking maneuvers, pay special at-
tention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer
hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect
such objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
truck air brakes, car wash, or jackhammers) may
impair the operation of the Parktronic system.

1 Sensors in the front bumper

234
Controls in detail
Driving systems

Minimum distance Warning indicators Each warning indicator is divided into six
Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel- yellow and two red distance segments for
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic
ative distance between the sensors and an
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) obstacle. system is ready when the border around
the indicator is illuminated.
The warning indicator for the front area is
If the system detects an obstacle in this The position of the gear selector lever de-
located above the center air vents in the
range, all the distance warning segments termines which warning indicators will be
dashboard. The warning indicator for the
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. activated.
rear area is integrated in the rear trim.
If the obstacle is closer than the minimum
distance, the actual distance may no Gear selector Warning indicator
longer be indicated by the system. lever position
D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area
activated
P Neither activated

Front area warning indicator


1 Left side of the vehicle
2 Right side of the vehicle

235
Controls in detail
Driving systems

As your vehicle approaches an object, one Switching the Parktronic system Switching on
or more distance segments will illuminate, on/off
Press Parktronic switch 1 once more.
depending on the distance. When the You can switch off the Parktronic system
eighth distance segment illuminates, you Indicator lamp 2 goes out.
manually.
have reached the minimum distance.
The Parktronic switch is located in the i The Parktronic system switches on automat-
Front area: An intermittent acoustic ically when you switch on the ignition
lower part of the center console. ( page 40).
warning will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
constant acoustic warning lasting a Parktronic system malfunction
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for If only the red distance segments illumi-
the second distance segment. nate and an acoustic warning sounds,
The signal is canceled when the gear there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
selector lever is placed in position P or system. The Parktronic system will auto-
the parking brake is set. matically switch off after 20 seconds and
Rear area: An intermittent acoustic the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch
warning will sound when the first dis- comes on.
tance segment illuminates. This signal 1 Parktronic switch Have the Parktronic system checked
quickens with each additional distance 2 Indicator lamp by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
segment lit. When the eighth distance Center as soon as possible.
segment illuminates, the acoustic Switching off
warning becomes a constant signal.
Press Parktronic switch 1.
The signal is canceled when the gear
selector lever is placed in position D Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
or P or the parking brake is set.

236
Controls in detail
Driving systems

If only the red distance segments illumi-


nate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty or
there is an interference from other radio or
ultrasonic signals. The Parktronic system
will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
Switch off the ignition ( page 40).
Clean the Parktronic system sensors
( page 337).
Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
or
Check the Parktronic system operation
at another location to rule out interfer-
ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
signals.

237
Controls in detail
Useful features

Storage compartments Glove box Door storage compartments

Warning! G Warning! G
Keep the door storage compartments
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
closed while vehicle is in motion. Failure to
sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
do so may cause the seat belt to catch at the
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
rear and prevent proper positioning of the
gage or cargo in the trunk if possible. Do not
seat belt.
pile luggage or cargo higher than the seat
backs. Do not place anything on shelf be-
hind roll bar. 1 Glove box lid release
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob- 2 Glove box lid
jects.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
Opening glove box
to prevent stored objects from being thrown Press glove box lid release 1.
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Glove box lid 2 opens downward.
an accident.
Closing glove box
Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
1 Release button
2 Storage compartment lid

238
Controls in detail
Useful features

Opening i The mobile phone cradle ( page 247), the Seat storage compartments
Roadside Assistance button ( page 253)
Press release button 1. Storage compartments are located in the
and the Information button ( page 254)
seat base of each seat and are intended for
Storage compartment lid 2 lid opens are located in the telephone* compartment.
storing small, light weight items.
upwards.
Opening telephone* compartment
Storage compartment/telephone* Press release button 2 and lift the
compartment under armrest armrest in direction of arrow 1.
The release buttons are located under the
cushion of the armrest. Opening storage compartment
Press release button 3 and lift the
armrest in direction of arrow 1.

Drivers seat storage compartment


1 Handle
2 Storage compartment lid
Pull handle 1 up.
Fold lid 2 down.
1 Opening
2 Telephone* compartment release i The passenger seat storage compartment
button contains the first aid kit, see First aid kit
( page 400).
3 Storage compartment release button

239
Controls in detail
Useful features

Rear storage compartments Locking storage compartments Locking the storage compartments
separately
The CD changer is located in the drivers The storage compartments are centrally
side storage compartment. locked when you lock the vehicle from the You can lock the storage compartments
outside. separately, e.g. when the vehicle is in the
For instructions on the CD changer, see
shop for service.
separate COMAND Operators Manual. You can also lock the storage compart-
ments separately, see Locking the stor-
age compartments separately
( page 240).

Drivers side rear storage compartment 1 Separately unlocking storage compart-


ments
1 Release button 2 Separately locking storage compart-
2 Storage compartment lid ments
Press release button 1. Remove the mechanical key from the
Storage compartment lid 2 opens SmartKey ( page 403).
upwards.

240
Controls in detail
Useful features

Insert the mechanical key into the Unlocking the storage compartments Parcel net in passenger footwell
glove box lock. separately A small convenience parcel net is located
Turn the mechanical key to position 2. Insert the mechanical key into the in the passenger footwell. It is for small
glove box lock. and light items, such as road maps, mail,
The following storage compartments
etc.
will be locked. They remain locked, Turn the mechanical key to position 1.
even when the vehicle is unlocked with
You can now open the storage
the SmartKey or with the SmartKey
compartments. Warning! G
with KEYLESS-GO*:
The parcel net is intended for storing
Glove box
light-weight items only.
Armrest storage compartments
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
Rear storage compartments fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel net. In an accident, during hard brak-
i The separate locking status of these storage ing, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
compartments can only be canceled with the
mechanical key. thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
The storage compartments in the doors cannot
be locked. The parcel net cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
i If the glove box cannot be unlocked using
the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*,
see Unlocking the glove box ( page 404).

241
Controls in detail
Useful features

Parcel nets in trunk Luggage compartment in the rear


There are three nets available in the trunk
to secure loads: Warning! G
a pocket net on each side of the right
Secure all pieces of luggage in the rear with
and left trunk side walls
the luggage straps. Unsecured pieces of
a trunk floor net luggage can otherwise cause injury during a
Pull the trunk floor net from the trunk braking maneuver and can increase the risk
back wall towards the front over the of injury in an accident.
luggage. Never allow anyone to ride in the rear.
Hang the hooks of the net on the eyes The luggage straps can only secure light lug-
on the trunk floor. gage items. Carry heavy pieces of luggage in
the trunk.
The rear compartment area is not designed
or intended to accommodate occupants.
Severe personal injury or death may be the
result in an accident.

1 Strap
2 Holder
3 Latch
4 Release button

242
Controls in detail
Useful features

Pull strap 1 out of holder 2. Cup holders


Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
Secure the luggage with the strap so holder may come lose during braking, vehi-
that it cannot move.
Warning! G cle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Ob-
Insert strap 1 into latch 3.
jects thrown around in the vehicle interior
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
may cause an accident and/or serious per-
Releasing strap vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
sonal injury.
ment, only use containers that fit into the
Press release button 4 and guide
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
strap 1 back to holder 2.
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
Warning! G during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu-
The shelf below the rear window should not pants may cause serious personal injury.
be used to carry objects. This will avoid such Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
objects from being thrown about and injur- cause damage not covered by the
ing vehicle occupants during an accident or Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
sudden maneuver.
When not in use, keep the cup holder
The trunk is the preferred place to carry closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
objects. 1 Left cup holder
to or others when contacted during braking,
2 Right cup holder
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.

Opening
Briefly press cup holder cover.
The cup holder opens automatically.

243
Controls in detail
Useful features

Ashtray Removing the ashtray insert Cigarette lighter

Warning! G Warning! G
Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
Never touch the heating element or sides of
still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
from movement. Move gear selector lever to
knob only.
position N. With gear selector lever in
position N, turn off the engine. Make sure that any children traveling with
you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter.
Secure vehicle from movement by set-
1 Cover plate ting the parking brake. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
2 Sliding knob SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Move the gear selector lever to from the starter switch, take it with you, and
position N. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children
Opening ashtray
Now you have more room to take out unattended in the vehicle, or with access to
Briefly touch cover plate 1.
the insert. an unlocked vehicle. A childs unsupervised
The ashtray opens automatically. access to a vehicle could result in an
Press sliding knob 2 to the right.
accident and/or serious personal injury.
Closing ashtray The insert will eject a short distance.
Press cover plate 1 down until it Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
Replacing the ashtray insert
latches.
Press the insert into the frame until it
snaps into place.

244
Controls in detail
Useful features

! The lighter socket can accommodate Load assist in the trunk


12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum
of 85 W) designed for use with the standard To facilitate trunk loading after opening the
cigarette lighter plug type. Keep in mind, how- trunk lid, use the load assist feature to
ever, that connecting accessories to the lighter raise the retracted hardtop from its stor-
socket (for example extensive connecting and age position in the trunk.
disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit prop-
erly) can damage the lighter socket. With the
socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be Warning! G
able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) posi-
tion, or the lighter may pop out too early with the To prevent injuries, make sure that there is
1 Cigarette lighter lighter not hot enough.
no possibility of body parts getting caught in
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter moving parts. If potential danger exists,
Push in cigarette lighter 1. socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec-
press the switch again. This will immediately
The lighter will pop out automatically trical accessories designed for use with the stan-
dard cigarette lighter plug type to the stop the movement of the hardtop.
when hot.
12V power outlet ( page 246) in your vehicle
whenever possible.

245
Controls in detail
Useful features

Raising the hardtop Power outlet


Press button 3.
A power outlet is located on the right side
Hardtop 1 rises a short distance. of the trunk.
Button 3 comes on brightly. You can
now open luggage cover 2.

Lowering the hardtop


Close luggage cover 2.

1 Retracted hardtop Press button 3.


2 Luggage cover Hardtop 1 lowers. Button 3 is dimly
3 Load assist button lit.
Hardtop 1 can only be raised or lowered ! Only close the trunk if the hardtop is com- Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
when pletely lowered. Otherwise you could damage
the hardtop. Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
luggage cover 2 is closed
If you begin to close the trunk lid before the hard- (cigarette lighter type).
the trunk lid is completely opened top is completely lowered, button 3 will flash
and a warning will sound.
i The power outlet can be used to accommo-
date electrical consumers (e.g. air pump,
auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum of 180 W.

246
Controls in detail
Useful features

Floormat* Telephone*

Warning! G Warning! G
Whenever you are using floormats, make Never operate radio transmitters equipped
sure there is enough clearance and the with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
floormats are securely fastened. out being connected to an external antenna)
Floormats should always be securely fas- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
tened using eyelets 1 and retainer pins 2. running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
1 Eyelet tion of the vehicles electronic system, pos-
Before driving off, check that the floormats sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious
are securely in place and adjust them if
2 Retainer pin
personal injury.
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
Removing
Pull floormat off of retainer pin 2 in Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
Do not place several floormats on top of phone or a citizens band unit, should only
each other as this may impair pedal move- direction of arrow 1.
be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
ment. Remove the floormat. nected to an antenna that is installed on
the outside of the vehicle.
i To install or remove the floormat more Installing
The external antenna must be approved by
easily, move the drivers seat as far to the rear Lay down the floormat. Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho-
as possible ( page 43).
Press the floormat eyelet 1 onto rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
retainer pin 2. tion on the installation of an approved
external antenna. Refer to the radio trans-
mitter operation instructions regarding use
of an external antenna.

247
Controls in detail
Useful features

i Various mobile phone cradles can be Please note that these functions are only
Warning! G installed in the center armrest, see separate available with Mercedes-Benz approved
installation instructions for the mobile phone mobile phones. Please contact an autho-
Please do not forget that your primary re- cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be rized Mercedes-Benz Center for informa-
sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A drivers obtained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz tion on features available for your mobile
attention to the road must always be Center.
phone of choice.
his/her primary focus when driving. For The functions and services available to you while
your safety and the safety of others, we rec- using the mobile phone depend on your service The cradle is located in the front center
ommend that you pull over to a safe location provider and the type of mobile phone you are armrest.
using. See also separate operating manual for
and stop before placing or taking a tele- Open the telephone compartment
instructions on how to use your mobile phone.
phone call. ( page 239).
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
If you choose to use the telephone1 while
cradle, you can operate the telephone Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
driving, please use the hands-free device
using the following devices: cradle
and only use the telephone when road,
weather and traffic conditions permit. Some mobile phone keypad Once the mobile phone has been inserted
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a in the mobile phone cradle, you have to
Voice Control System* (see separate
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle. use the hands-free device to respond
operating instructions)
Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit during phone calls.
COMAND (see separate operating
Management and Data System)1 if road,
instructions) ! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along
weather, and traffic conditions permit. with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the
buttons s and t on the multi- mobile phone cradle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
function steering wheel ( page 144)
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second.
1
Observe all legal requirements.

248
Controls in detail
Useful features

If applicable, remove the cover for the Push the top of the mobile phone in di- i When you take the SmartKey out of the
external antenna connection from the rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the starter switch, the mobile phone remains
back of the mobile phone and store it in mobile phone release button engages. switched on for approximately 10 minutes. If you
a safe place. Be sure to comply with the place or receive a call during this time, the
The mobile phone is connected to the mobile phone switches off 10 minutes after the
mobile phones operating instructions
network via the external antenna. call has been completed.
as well.
The mobile phone is linked to the
hands-free device and the multifunc- Removing mobile phone from mobile
tion steering wheel. phone cradle

The battery is charged depending on its


charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The
charge procedure will be indicated in
the mobile phones display.
You can place or receive phone calls. You
Example illustration
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the control system
1 Insert the mobile phone ( page 169), the Voice Control System*
2 Connector contact (see separate operating instructions), or Example illustration
3 Mobile phone cradle COMAND (see separate operating 1 Release catch for mobile phone
Slide the lower end of the mobile phone instructions). 2 Mobile phone cradle
into connector contact 2 on
cradle 3. i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
flip top before removing from the cradle while a
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis-
connected.

249
Controls in detail
Useful features

Press release catch in direction of Press release button in direction of Tele Aid
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of arrow 1 and take mobile phone
mobile phone cradle 2. cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2. ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system
may only be performed by completing the sub-
Changing mobile phone cradle Installing a different mobile phone scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance
cradle call using the button. Failure to complete
If you require a different cradle for your either of these steps will result in a system that
mobile phone, remove the present cradle is not activated.
before installing a new one. If you have any questions regarding activation,
please call the Response Center at
Removing an existing mobile phone 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or
cradle 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).

Example illustration
1 Contact plate
2 Recesses
3 Mobile phone cradle
Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into
Example illustration recesses 2 of contact plate 1.
1 To release the mobile phone cradle
Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward
2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
until it engages.
3 Mobile phone cradle

250
Controls in detail
Useful features

The Tele Aid system i The SOS button is located above the interior Information button stay on longer
rear view mirror ( page 253). than 10 seconds or do not come on). The
(Telematic Alarm Identification on De-
The Roadside Assistance button and the message Tele Aid Inoperative appears
mand)
Information button are located below the for approximately 10 seconds in the multi-
The Tele Aid system consists of three center armrest cover ( page 239). function display.
types of response:
Shortly after the completion of your Tele
Automatic and manual emergency Aid acquaintance call, you will receive a Warning! G
Roadside Assistance user ID and password. By visiting
www.mbusa.com and selecting Tele Aid If the indicator lamps in the SOS button, in
Information (USA only), you will have access to account the Roadside Assistance button, and/or in
The Tele Aid system is operational provid- information, remote door unlock, and the Information button do not come on dur-
ing that the vehicles battery is charged, more. ing the system self-check, or if any of these
properly connected, not damaged and cel- indicators remain illuminated continuously
lular and GPS coverage is available.
! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular in red and/or the message Tele Aid
network for communication and the GPS (Global
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle loca- Inoperative is displayed in the multifunc-
The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
tion. If either of these signals are unavailable, the tion display after the system self-check,
be adjusted when using the volume control
Tele Aid system may not function and if this a malfunction in the system has been
on the multifunction steering wheel. To
occurs, assistance must be summoned by other detected.
raise, press button and to lower, means.
press button or use the volume knob If a malfunction is indicated as outlined
on your COMAND headunit. above, the system may not operate as ex-
System self-check
pected. Have the system checked at the
To activate, press the SOS button, the Initially, after switching on the ignition, nearest Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Roadside Assistance button or malfunctions are detected and indicated possible.
the Information button , depend- (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
ing on the type of response required. Roadside Assistance button and the

251
Controls in detail
Useful features

Emergency calls A voice connection between the Response


An emergency call is initiated
Center and the occupants of the vehicle Warning! G
will be established automatically soon af-
automatically following an accident in If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
ter the emergency call has been initiated.
which the emergency tensioning devices flashing continuously and there was no
The Response Center will attempt to deter-
(ETDs) or air bags deploy. voice connection to the Response Center
mine more precisely the nature of the
An emergency call can also be initiated emergency provided they can speak to an established, then the Tele Aid system could
manually by opening the cover next to the occupant of the vehicle. not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then vant cellular phone network is not available).
The Tele Aid system is available if The message Call Failed appears in the
briefly pressing the button located under
the cover. See ( page 253) for instruc- it has been activated and is operational multifunction display for approximately
tions on initiating an emergency call man- 10 seconds.
Activation requires a subscription for
ually. monitoring services, connection and Should this occur, assistance must be sum-
Once the emergency call is in progress, the cellular air time. moned by other means.
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin
the relevant cellular phone network
to flash. The message Connecting Call
and GPS signals are available and pass
appears in the multifunction display and the information on to the Response
the audio system is muted. When the con- Center
nection is established, the message
Call Connected appears in the multifunc- i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos-
tion display. All information relevant to the sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
emergency, such as the location of the ve- the GPS satellite network and pass the informa-
tion on to the Response Center.
hicle (determined by the GPS satellite loca-
tion system), vehicle model, identification
number and color are generated.

252
Controls in detail
Useful features

Initiating an emergency call manually Roadside Assistance button


Warning! G The Roadside Assistance button is
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the located below the center armrest cover.
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca-
tion. The Response Center will automatically
contact local emergency officials with the
1 Cover vehicles approximate location if they
2 SOS button receive an automatic SOS signal and
cannot make voice contact with the vehicle
Briefly press on cover 1. occupants. 1 Roadside Assistance button
The cover opens. Open the telephone* compartment
( page 239).
Press SOS button 2 briefly.
Press and hold button 1 (for longer
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
than 2 seconds)
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded. A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
Wait for a voice connection to the
The button will flash while the call is in
Response Center.
progress.
Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.

253
Controls in detail
Useful features

The message Connecting Call will ap- The following is only available in the USA: Information button
pear in the multifunction display and
Sign and Drive services: Services such The Information button is located
the audio system is muted.
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or below the center armrest cover.
When the connection is established, the the replacement of a flat tire with the
message Call Connected appears in the vehicle spare tire are obtainable.
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle i The indicator lamp in the Roadside
Assistance button remains illuminated in
identification number, model, color and lo- red for approximately 10 seconds during the
cation (subject to availability of cellular system self-check after switching on the ignition
and GPS signals). (together with the SOS button and the Informa-
tion button ).
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants See system self-check ( page 251) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
of the vehicle will be established.
longer than approximately 10 seconds. 1 Information button
Describe the nature of the need for as- If the indicator lamp in the Roadside Assistance
sistance. Open the telephone* compartment
button is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center ( page 239).
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
established, then the Tele Aid system could not Press and hold button 1 (for longer
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to than 2 seconds).
vant cellular phone network is not available). The
tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized message Call Failed appears in the multi- A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such function display. ter will be initiated. The button will
as labor and/or towing, charges may Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us- flash while the call is in progress. The
apply. Refer to the Roadside Assistance ing the t button on the multifunction steer- message Connecting Call will appear
Manual for more information. ing wheel or the respective button for ending a in the multifunction display and the
telephone call on the COMAND headunit. audio system is muted.

254
Controls in detail
Useful features

When the connection is established, the i The indicator lamp in the Information ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
message Call Connected appears in the button remains illuminated in red for ap- after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system proximately 10 seconds during the system minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- has detected a malfunction or the service is cur-
identification number, model, color and lo- er with the SOS button and the Roadside Assis- rently not active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
tance button ). an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center and have
cation (subject to availability of cellular the system checked or contact the
and GPS signals). See system self-check ( page 251) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the
A voice connection between the Customer longer than approximately 10 seconds. USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as
possible.
Assistance Center representative and the If the indicator lamp in the Information
occupants of the vehicle will be estab- button is flashing continuously and no
lished. Information regarding the operation voice connection to the Response Center was
of your vehicle, the nearest established, then the Tele Aid system could not
Mercedes-Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant
USA products and services is available to cellular phone network is not available). The
message Call Failed appears in the multi-
you. function display.
For more details concerning the Tele Aid Information calls can be terminated using the
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and t button on the multifunction steering wheel
use your ID and password (sent to you sep- or the respective button for ending a telephone
arately) to learn more (USA only). call on the COMAND headunit.

255
Controls in detail
Useful features

Call priority i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the Remote door unlock
COMAND system audio is muted and the
If other service calls such as a Roadside In case you have locked your vehicle unin-
selected mode (radio or CD) pauses.
Assistance call or Information call are The optional cellular phone (if installed) switches tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
active, an Emergency call is still possible. off. If you must use this phone, the vehicle must and the reserve SmartKey is not handy:
In this case, the Emergency call will take be parked. Disconnect the coiled cord and place Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
priority and override all other active calls. the call. The COMAND navigation system (if
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA)
engaged) will continue to run. The display in the
i The indicator lamp in the respective button instrument cluster is available for use and or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada).
flashes until the call is concluded. Calls can only spoken commands are only available by pressing You will be asked to provide your pass-
be terminated by a Response Center or the RPT button on the COMAND unit. A pop-up
Customer Assistance Center representative word which you provided when you
window will appear in the COMAND display to
except Roadside Assistance and Information indicate that a Tele Aid call is in progress.
completed the subscriber agreement.
calls, which can also be terminated by pressing Then return to your vehicle and pull the
button t on the multifunction steering wheel
trunk recessed handle for a minimum
or the respective button for ending a telephone
call on the COMAND headunit. of 20 seconds until the SOS button is
flashing.
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or The message Call Connected appears
the system does not reset, contact the Response
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or in the multifunction display.
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi-
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
cle via Internet using the ID and password
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer
Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. sent to you shortly after the completion of
your acquaintance call.

256
Controls in detail
Useful features

The Response Center will then unlock your Stolen Vehicle Recovery services Garage door opener
vehicle with the remote door unlocking
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
feature. The integrated remote control is capable of
Report the incident to the police. operating up to three separately controlled
i The remote door unlock feature is available devices. It provides a convenient way to
if the relevant cellular phone network is avail- The police will issue a numbered
incident report. replace up to three hand-held remote
able.
controls used to operate devices such as
The SOS button will flash and the message Call Pass this number on to the garage door openers, gate openers, or
Connected will appear in the multifunction dis- Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
play to indicate receipt of the door unlock com-
other devices compatible with HomeLink
with your password issued to you when or some other systems.
mand.
you subscribed to the service.
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center Before the integrated remote control can
specialist will attempt to establish voice contact The Response Center will then attempt be used, it must be programmed to the
with the vehicle occupants. to covertly contact the vehicles Tele garage door opener, gate operator or other
If the trunk recessed handle was pulled for more Aid system. Once the vehicle is locat- device you wish to operate. See the
than 20 seconds before door unlock authoriza- ed, the Response Center will contact following instructions for programming
tion was received by the Response Center, you the local law enforcement and you. The information.
must wait 15 minutes before pulling the trunk re- vehicles location will only be provided
cessed handle again. to law enforcement.
i If the anti-theft alarm or the tow-away alarm
stays on for more than 30 seconds, a call to the
Response Center is initiated automatically by the
Tele Aid system provided Tele Aid service was
subscribed to and properly activated, and that
necessary cellular service and GPS coverage are
available. See anti-theft alarm system
( page 98) and tow away alarm ( page 100).

257
Controls in detail
Useful features

Warning! G When programming a garage door opener,


park the vehicle outside the garage.
Before programming the integrated remote Do not run the engine while programming
control to a garage door opener or gate the integrated remote control.
operator, make sure people and objects are Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
out of the way of the device to prevent po- your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
tential harm or damage. When programming monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
a garage door opener, the door moves up or consciousness and possible death.
down. When programming a gate operator,
Interior rear view mirror with integrated the gate opens or closes. Programming the integrated remote
remote control control
Do not use the integrated remote control
1 Indicator lamp with any garage door opener that lacks Step 1:
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button safety stop and reverse features as required
Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
Needed for programming (not part of includes any garage door opener model
vehicle equipment): manufactured before April 1, 1982).
5 Hand-held remote control of A garage door that cannot detect an object
garage door opener, gate signaling the door to stop and reverse
operator or other device does not meet current U.S. federal safety
standards.
6 Hand-held remote control
button

258
Controls in detail
Useful features

Step 2: Step 3: Step 5:


If you have previously programmed an Hold the end of hand-held remote After indicator lamp 1 changes from a
signal transmitter button and wish to control 5 of the device you wish to slow to a rapidly flashing light, release
retain its programming, proceed to train approximately 2 to 5 in the hand-held remote control button
step 3. (5 to12 cm) away from the signal trans- and the signal transmitter button.
mitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be pro-
If you are programming the integrated Step 6:
grammed, while keeping indicator
remote control for the first time, press
lamp 1 in view. Press and hold the just-trained signal
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release Step 4:
observe indicator lamp 1.
them only when indicator lamp 1
Using both hands, simultaneously
begins to flash after approximately If indicator lamp 1 stays on
press hand-held remote control constantly, programming is complete
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
button 6 and the desired signal trans- and your device should activate when
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not the respective signal transmitter
dure erases any previous settings for
release the buttons until step 5 is com- button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re-
all three channels and initializes the
pleted. leased.
memory.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
If you later wish to program a second
and then rapidly. i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
and/or third hand-held transmitter to 2 seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the remaining two signal transmitter i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the continue with programming steps 8 through 12
first time the signal transmitter button is pro- as your garage door opener may be equipped
buttons, do not repeat this step and be-
grammed. If this button has already been pro- with the rolling code feature.
gin directly with step 3.
grammed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds.

259
Controls in detail
Useful features

Step 7: Step 9: Step 12:


To program the remaining two signal Press the training button on the ga- Confirm the garage door operation by
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps rage door opener motor head unit. pressing the programmed signal trans-
above starting with step 3. mitter button (2, 3 or 4).
The training light is activated.
Step 13:
Rolling code programming You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
ing step. To program the remaining two signal
To train a garage door opener (or other
Step 10: transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
rolling code devices) with the rolling code
above starting with step 3.
feature, follow these instructions after Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
completing the Programming portion hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-
(steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second grammed signal transmitter button
person may make the following training (2, 3 or 4).
procedures quicker and easier.)
Step 11:
Step 8:
Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
Locate training button on the garage same signal transmitter button a sec-
door opener motor head unit. ond time to complete the training pro-
Exact location and color of the button cess.
may vary by garage door opener brand.
i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
Depending on manufacturer, the code equipped devices) may require you to
training button may also be referred press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
to as learn or smart button. If there signal transmitter button a third time to com-
is difficulty locating the transmitting plete the training process.
button, refer to the garage door opener
Operators Manual.

260
Controls in detail
Useful features

Gate operator/Canadian programming While still holding down the signal Reprogramming a single signal trans-
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), mitter button
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
cycle your hand-held remote control
transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) To program a device using a signal trans-
button 6 as follows: Press and hold
after several seconds of transmission mitter button previously trained, follow
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release
which may not be long enough for the these steps:
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the
hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
signal during programming. Similar to this
quence on the hand-held remote con- Press and hold the desired signal
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
trol until the frequency signal has been transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
are designed to time-out in the same
learned. Upon successful training, indi- Do not release the button.
manner.
cator lamp 1 will flash slowly and then
If you live in Canada or if you are having Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af-
rapidly after several seconds.
difficulties programming a gate operator ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
Proceed with programming step 5 and signal transmitter button, proceed with
(regardless of where you live) by using the
step 6 to complete. programming starting with step 3.
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following: i Upon completion of programming the inte-
grated remote control, make sure you retain the
Step 4:
hand-held remote control that came with the ga-
Press and hold the signal transmitter rage door opener, gate operator or other device.
button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu-
this button until it has been success- ture programming of an integrated remote con-
trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
fully trained.
remote control to operate the respective device
in other situations.

261
Controls in detail
Useful features

Operation of integrated remote control Programming tips If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). If you are having difficulty programming
the integrated remote control, here are programming steps again using that
Select and press the appropriate inte- other hand-held remote control. Make
some helpful tips:
grated signal transmitter button (2, sure new batteries are in the hand-held
3 or 4) to activate the remote con- Check the frequency of hand-held re- remote control before beginning the
trolled device. mote control 5 (typically located on procedure.
The integrated remote control trans- the reverse side of the remote). The in-
Straighten the antenna wire from the
mitter continues to send the signal as tegrated remote control is compatible
garage door opener assembly. This
long as the button is pressed up to with radio-frequency devices operating
may help improve transmitting and/or
20 seconds. between 280-390 MHz.
receiving signals.
Put a new battery in hand-held remote
Erasing the integrated remote control control 5. This will increase the likeli- i Certain types of garage door openers are in-
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
memory hood of the hand-held remote control
you should experience further difficulties with
sending a faster and more accurate sig-
Switch on the ignition ( page 40). programming the integrated remote control,
nal to the integrated remote control. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
Simultaneously press and hold outer call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
While performing step 3, hold
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4, Center (in the USA only) at
hand-held remote control 5 at
for approximately 20 seconds, until the 1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Service (in
different lengths and angles from the
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
signal transmitter button (2, 3 or 4)
not hold for longer than 30 seconds.
you are programming. Attempt varying
The codes of all three channels are angles at the distance of
erased. 2 to 5 in (5 to 12 cm) away or the
same angle at varying distances.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.

262
Controls in detail
Useful features

i USA only:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the users authority to operate the
equipment.

i Canada only:
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the users authority to operate the
equipment.

263
264
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care

265
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)

In the Operation section you will find de- The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km), you may
tailed information on operating, maintain- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
ing and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on.
! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:
Drive your vehicle during the first During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
During this period, avoid engine speeds
During this period, avoid heavy loads above 4500 rpm (SL 55 AMG) or
(full throttle driving) and excessive en- 4000 rpm (SL 65 AMG) in each gear.
gine speeds (no more than 2/3 of maxi- All of the above instructions, as may apply
mum rpm in each gear). to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
Avoid accelerating by kickdown. ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
the engine or the rear differential has been
Do not attempt to slow the vehicle replaced.
down by shifting to a lower gear using
the gear selector lever. i Always obey applicable speed limits.
Select gear 3, 2 or 1 only when driving
at moderate speeds (for hill driving).
Select C as the preferred shift
program ( page 177) for the first
1 000 miles (1500 km).

266
Operation
Driving instructions
Driving instructions
Drive sensibly save fuel Drinking and driving Pedals

Fuel consumption, to a great extent, de-


pends on driving habits and operating con- Warning! G Warning! G
ditions.
Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
and driving are a very dangerous combina- structing the pedals range of movement.
Keep tires at the recommended infla- tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or Keep the drivers footwell clear of all obsta-
tion pressures. drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
Remove unnecessary loads. and judgment. the footwell, make sure the pedals still have
The possibility of a serious or even fatal ac- sufficient clearance. This could lead to acci-
Allow engine to warm up under low dents or injury.
cident are greatly increased when you drink
load use.
or take drugs and drive.
Avoid frequent acceleration and decel-
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
eration.
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
Have all maintenance work performed taking drugs.
at the intervals specified in the
Maintenance Booklet and as required
by the maintenance system. Contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Fuel consumption is also increased by driv-
ing in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic,
on short trips and in hilly area.

267
Operation
Driving instructions

Power assistance Brakes


A tow bar must be used if circumstances do
not permit the use of the recommended

Warning! G towing methods and the vehicle requires


towing with all four wheels on the ground.
Warning! G
Towing the vehicle with all four wheels on
The brake system requires electrical energy After driving in heavy rain for some time
the ground is only permissible for distances
for operation. without applying the brakes or through wa-
up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed not to
A malfunction in the vehicles power supply ter deep enough to wet brake components,
exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). For more infor-
or electrical system may impair brake sys- the first braking action may be somewhat
mation, see Towing the vehicle
tem operation and switch it into its emer- reduced and increased pedal pressure may
( page 434).
gency operation mode. In such a case, the be necessary to obtain expected braking
With the engine not running, there is no effect. Maintain a safe distance from
red brake warning lamp ( page 345) and
power assistance for the brake and steering vehicles in front.
warning messages ( page 359) in the in-
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
strument cluster come on while driving. To Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
brake, the driver must then apply signifi- cause excessive and premature wear of the
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
cantly greater brake pedal pressure and de- brake pads.
vehicle.
press the pedal much further to obtain the It can also result in the brakes overheating
expected braking effect. If necessary, apply thereby significantly reducing their effec-
full pressure to the brake pedal. Brakes are tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
only applied to the front wheels. Stopping vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
distance is increased! If there is a malfunc- accident.
tion in the electro-hydraulic brake system,
we recommend that the vehicle be trans-
ported with all wheels off the ground using
flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly equip-
ment.

268
Operation
Driving instructions

! Because the ESP operates automatically, All checks and service work on the brake
the engine must be shut off (SmartKey in starter Warning! G system should be carried out by qualified
switch position 0 or 1or KEYLESS-GO* technicians only. Contact an authorized
start/stop button in position 0 or 1) when the Make sure not to endanger any other road Mercedes-Benz Center.
parking brake is being tested on a brake test users when carrying out these braking
dynamometer. maneuvers. Only install brake pads and brake fluid

Active braking action through the ESP may recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
otherwise seriously damage the brake system.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after System (BAS) ( page 91). Warning! G
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may If other than recommended brake pads are
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the
be the reason for low brake fluid in the installed, or other than recommended brake
vehicle with considerable force prior to
reservoir. fluid is used, the braking properties of the
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
the brakes. The brake fluid level in the reservoir may vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
be too low or the electro-hydraulic brake safe braking is substantially impaired. This
If your brake system is normally only could result in an accident.
system may be malfunctioning if the brake
subjected to moderate loads, you should
warning lamp in the instrument cluster Be certain to read and observe the warning
occasionally test the effectiveness of the
comes on and an acoustic warning sounds notices on brake pad replacement
brakes by applying above-normal braking
although the parking brake is released ( page 96).
pressure at higher speeds. This will also
( page 345).
enhance the grip of the brake pads.
Observe additional messages in the
multifunction display that may appear, see ! When driving down long and steep grades,
relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
( page 377) through ( page 382). lower gear to use the engines braking power.
Have the brake system inspected immedi- This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
ately. Contact an authorized reduces brake pad wear.
Mercedes-Benz Center.

269
Operation
Driving instructions

After hard braking, it is advisable to drive ing style calling for high demand braking Driving off
on for some time, rather than to park im- will cause your vehicles brakes to wear
mediately, so the air stream will cool down more quickly. Apply the brakes to test them briefly after
the brakes faster. driving off. Perform this procedure only
when the road is clear of other traffic.
High-performance brake system
Warning! G
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not
(AMG vehicles only) New vehicle brake pads and discs, and place full load on the engine until the oper-
The high-performance brake system is de- replacement brake pads and discs may take ating temperature has been reached.
signed to operate under the extremely high several hundred miles of driving until they
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until
! When starting off on a slippery surface, do
operating demands required to accommo- not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
date the performance capabilities of the that time, you may need to use increased period with the ESP switched off. Doing so may
vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeak- brake pedal pressure while braking. Please cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
ing-type noise depending on the be aware of this and adjust your driving and not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
braking accordingly during this break-in Warranty.
vehicle speed
period.
brake force applied ! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
Excessive high demand braking will cause pedal and applying the brake reduces engine
ambient conditions, e.g. temperature correspondingly high brake wear. Please be performance and causes premature brake and
and humidity attentive to the brake warning lamp in the drivetrain wear.
instrument cluster and brake condition mes-
As with any brake system, the wear of indi-
sages in the multifunction display. Especial-
vidual brake system components such as
ly for high performance driving, it is
brake pads or disks strongly depends on
important to maintain and have the brake
your driving style and the conditions under
system checked regularly.
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driv-

270
Operation
Driving instructions

Parking Tires
When parked on an incline, turn front
wheels towards the road curb.

Warning! G Turn the SmartKey or the SmartKey with


KEYLESS-GO* to starter switch
Warning! G
position 0 and remove, or press the
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button.
bustible materials such as grass, hay or ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
leaves can come into contact with the hot Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
exhaust system, as these materials could be KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
when leaving.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire. ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
To reduce the risk of personal injury or tion to an area which is a safe distance from
damage to the vehicle drivetrain as a result the road.
of vehicle movement, before turning off the Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
engine and leaving the vehicle always: for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
Keep right foot on brake pedal. appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire
Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
dealer for repairs.
Move the gear selector lever to
position P.
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Slowly release brake pedal. law. These indicators are located in six
places on the tread circumference and be-
come visible at a tread depth of approxi-
mately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the
tire is considered worn and should be re-
placed.

271
Operation
Driving instructions

The treadwear indicator appears as a solid Specified tire inflation pressures must be Hydroplaning
band across the tread. maintained. This applies particularly if the
tires are subjected to extreme operating Depending on the depth of the water layer
on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
Warning! G conditions (e.g. high speeds, heavy loads,
high ambient temperatures). at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
Although the applicable federal motor
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be Warning! G rain.
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
become visible at approximately Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
1/ in (1.6 mm), we recommend that you the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
16
do not allow your tires to wear down to may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
that level. As tread depth approaches driving with a flat tire or driving at high
1/ in (3 mm), the adhesion properties on a speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
8
wet road are sharply reduced. heat build-up and possibly a fire.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies For more information, see Tires and
widely. wheels ( page 291).

272
Operation
Driving instructions

Tire traction Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Tire speed rating


( page 327) with a minimum tread depth
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
icy road is always lower than on a dry road. wheels for the winter season to ensure speed limits should be obeyed. Use pru-
normal balanced handling characteristics. dent driving speeds appropriate to prevail-
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside On packed snow, they can reduce your ing conditions.
temperatures are close to the freezing stopping distance as compared with sum-
point. mer tires. Stopping distance, however, is Warning! G
still considerably greater than when the
road is not covered with snow or ice. Exer-
Warning! G cise appropriate caution.
Even when permitted by law, never operate
a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may mum speed rating of the tires.
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is Exceeding the maximum speed for which
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited tires are rated can lead to sudden tire fail-
Warranty.
with extreme caution. ure, causing loss of vehicle control and pos-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.

273
Operation
Driving instructions

An electronic speed limiter prevents your For information on how to identify the tire Winter driving instructions
vehicle from exceeding a speed of: speed rating on a tires sidewall, see Tire
size designation, load and speed rating The most important rule for slippery or icy
SL 550
( page 313). roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid
SL 550 (Sport Package*)
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
SL 600 If you are uncertain about the correct
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
SL 600 (Sport Package*) reading of the information given on a tires
system under such conditions.
SL 55 AMG sidewall, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
SL 65 AMG: Center will be glad to assist you. When the vehicle is in danger of skidding,
155 mph (250 km/h) move gear selector lever to position N. Try
i For information on tire speed rating for to keep the vehicle under control by cor-
SL 55 AMG (Performance Package*) winter tires, see All-season and winter tires
rective steering action.
SL 65 AMG with increased top speed*: ( page 316).
186 mph (300 km/h) For additional general information markings on i For information on driving with snow chains,
tire sidewall, see Tire size designation, load and see Snow chains ( page 329).
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
speed rating ( page 313).
may have a tire speed rating above the
maximum speed permitted by the Warning! G
electronic speed limiter.
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
Make sure your tires have the required tire
in order to obtain braking action. This could
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
result in drive wheel slip and reduced
the Technical data section ( page 449),
vehicle control. Your vehicles ABS will not
for example when purchasing new tires.
prevent this type of control loss.

274
Operation
Driving instructions

Road salts and chemicals can adversely Standing water


affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Warning! G
force may become necessary to produce ! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
the normal brake effect. If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make of unknown depth. Before driving through water,
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust determine its depth. Never accelerate before
Depressing the brake pedal periodically pipe and from around the vehicle with the driving into water. The bow wave could force wa-
when traveling at length on salt-strewn engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in- damaging them.
efficiency back to normal. terior resulting in unconsciousness and If you must drive through standing water, drive
If the vehicle is parked after being driven death. slowly to prevent water from entering the pas-
senger compartment or the engine compart-
on salt-treated roads, the braking To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, ment. Water in these areas could cause damage
efficiency should be tested as soon as open a window slightly on the side of the ve- to electrical components or wiring of the engine
possible after driving is resumed. hicle not facing the wind. or transmission, or could result in water being in-
gested by the engine through the air intake,
Warning! G causing severe internal engine damage. Any
such damage is not covered by the
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking ma- The outside temperature indicator is not de-
neuvers. signed to serve as an Ice-Warning Device
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Indicated temperatures just above the freez-
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
face is free of ice.

For more information, see Winter driving


( page 327).

275
Operation
Driving instructions

Passenger compartment Control and operation of radio trans- Telephones and two-way radios
mitters

Warning! G Warning! G
COMAND, radio and telephone
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
Always fasten items being carried as secure-
G
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
ly as possible. Warning! out being connected to an external antenna)
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Please do not forget that your primary re-
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury sponsibility is to drive the vehicle safely.
tion of the vehicles electronic system, pos-
to vehicle occupants unless the items are Only operate the COMAND (Cockpit Man-
sibly resulting in an accident and/or
securely fastened in the vehicle. agement and Data System), radio or tele-
personal injury.
phone1 if road, weather, and traffic
The trunk is the preferred place to carry ob- conditions permit.
jects. Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele-
Bear in mind that at a speed of just
phone or a citizens band unit should only
30 mph (approximately 50 km/h), your
Driving abroad be used inside the vehicle if they are con-
vehicle is covering a distance of
nected to an antenna that is installed on
44 feet (approximately 14 m) every second.
Abroad, there is an extensive the outside of the vehicle.
1
Mercedes-Benz service network at your Observe all legal requirements.
Refer to the radio transmitter operation in-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas structions regarding use of an external an-
which are not listed in the index of your tenna.
Mercedes-Benz Center directory, you
should request pertinent information from
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

276
Operation
Driving instructions

Catalytic converter Emission control


Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with Certain systems of the engine serve to
monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- keep the toxic components of the exhaust
important element in conjunction with erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- gases within permissible limits required by
the oxygen sensors to achieve substantial ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves law.
control of the pollutants in the exhaust can come into contact with the hot exhaust
These systems, of course, will function
emissions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
properly only when maintained strictly
operating condition by following our and cause a vehicle fire.
according to factory specifications. Any
recommended maintenance instructions
adjustments on the engine should there-
as outlined in your Maintenance Booklet.
fore be carried out only by qualified
! To prevent damage to the catalytic convert- Mercedes-Benz Center authorized techni-
ers, only use premium unleaded gasoline in this cians. Engine adjustments should not be
vehicle. altered in any way. Moreover, the specified
Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation service jobs must be carried out regularly
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces- according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con- requirements. For details refer to the
verter causing it to overheat and potentially start Maintenance Booklet.
a fire.

277
Operation
Driving instructions

Coolant temperature
Warning! G Warning! G
During severe operating conditions, e.g.
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant Driving when your engine is overheated
your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon temperature may rise close to approxi- can cause some fluids, which may have
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un- mately 248F (120C). leaked into the engine compartment, to
consciousness and possible death. catch fire. You could be seriously
The engine should not be operated burned.
Do not run the engine in confined areas with the coolant temperature over Steam from an overheated engine can
(such as a garage) which are not properly 248F (120C). Doing so may cause cause serious burns and can occur just
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas serious engine damage which is not by opening the engine hood. Stay away
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving, covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited from the engine if you see or hear steam
have the cause determined and corrected Warranty. coming from it. Turn off the engine, get
immediately. If you must drive under these out of the vehicle and do not stand near
conditions, drive only with at least one win- the vehicle until the engine has cooled
dow fully open at all times. down.

278
Operation
At the gas station
At the gas station
Refueling Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the Turn off the engine
SmartKey or the SmartKey with
Vehicles with SmartKey: Remove the
KEYLESS-GO* automatically locks/un-
Warning! G locks the fuel filler flap.
SmartKey from the starter switch.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Open the
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. i In case that the central locking system drivers door (this puts the starter
does not release the fuel filler flap, or the
It burns violently and can cause serious switch in position 0, same as with the
opening mechanism is clamping, notify Roadside
personal injury. Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-Benz SmartKey removed from starter
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- Center. switch).
rials near gasoline! Open fuel filler flap 1 by pushing at
Turn off the engine before refueling. the point indicated by the arrow.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid The fuel filler flap springs open.
inhaling fumes and skin contact, extinguish Turn fuel cap 2 counterclockwise and
all smoking materials. hold on to it until possible pressure is
Direct skin contact with fuels and the released.
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your Take off fuel cap 2 and place it into
health. holder 3 located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
The fuel filler flap is located on the 1 Fuel filler flap Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the 2 Fuel filler cap unit cuts out do not top off or
rear. 3 Holder overfill.

279
Operation
At the gas station

i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with a Check regularly and before a long trip
Warning! G minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91 (average of
96 RON/86 MON). For information on quantities and require-
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres- Information on gasoline quality can normally be ments of operating agents, see Fuels,
sure in the system which could cause a gas found on the fuel pump. Please contact gas coolants, lubricants, etc. ( page 457).
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray station personal in case labels on the pump
Open the hood ( page 282).
back out when removing the fuel pump noz- cannot be found.
zle, which could cause personal injury. For more information on gasoline, see Premium
unleaded gasoline ( page 461), refer to the
Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet
Insert fuel cap 2 into fuel filler neck
(USA only), or contact an authorized
and turn fuel cap clockwise until it au- Mercedes-Benz-Center.
dibly engages.
Close fuel filler flap 1.
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap
open can cause the engine malfunction indicator
You should hear the latch close shut. lamp (USA only) or the engine malfunction
indicator lamp (Canada only) to illuminate.
For more information, see the Practical hints
section ( page 346). 1 Windshield washer and headlamp
cleaning system
2 Brake fluid
3 Coolant level

280
Operation
At the gas station

Windshield washer and headlamp Coolant level


cleaning system For information on checking the coolant
For information on refilling the reservoir, level, see Coolant ( page 288).
see Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system ( page 289). Engine oil level
For more information on checking the en-
Brake fluid
gine oil level, see Engine oil
For information on brake fluid, see Fuels, ( page 283).
coolants, lubricants, etc. ( page 457).
Vehicle lighting
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or Check function and cleanliness. For more
below, have the brake system checked for brake information, see Replacing bulbs
pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an ( page 409).
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Do not add brake fluid as this will not solve the Exterior lamp switch, see Switching on
problem. For more information, see the Practi- headlamps ( page 57).
cal hints section ( page 381).
Tire inflation pressure
For information on checking the tire infla-
tion pressure, see Checking tire inflation
pressure ( page 302).

281
Operation
Engine compartment

Hood
Warning! G Warning! G
Warning! G You could be injured when the hood is open The engine is equipped with a transistorized
even when the engine is turned off. ignition system. Because of the high voltage
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- Parts of the engine can become very hot. To it is dangerous to touch any components (ig-
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could prevent burns, let the engine cool off com- nition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
be forced open by passing air flow. pletely before touching any components on socket) of the ignition system
This could cause the hood to come loose the vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety with the engine running
and injure you and/or others. precautions. while starting the engine
if ignition is on and the engine is
Opening turned manually
Warning! G
Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine is running.
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
overheated, do not open the hood. Move proximately 30 seconds or may even restart
away from the vehicle and do not open the after the engine has been turned off. Stay
hood until the engine has cooled. If neces- clear of fan blades.
sary, call the fire department.

1 Hood release

282
Operation
Engine compartment

Pull hood release 1. Closing Engine oil


The hood is unlocked.
The amount of oil your engine needs will
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or
Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are driving style. Higher oil consumption can
folded forward away from the windshield. When closing the hood, use extreme caution
occur when
not to catch hand or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone. the vehicle is new
Make sure the hood is securely engaged be- the vehicle is driven frequently at
fore driving. Do not continue driving if the higher engine speeds
hood can no longer engage after an accident
Engine oil consumption checks should only
for example. The hood could otherwise
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
come loose while the vehicle is in motion
and injure you and/or others. ! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Let the hood drop from a height of Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered
2 Lever for opening the hood approximately 11/2 ft (50 cm). by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. More
The hood will lock audibly. information on this subject is available at any
Push lever 2 on the hood upwards. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Pull up on the hood and then release it. Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled If you can raise the hood at a point
struts. above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.

283
Operation
Engine compartment

Checking engine oil level with the Switch on the ignition ( page 40). One of the following messages will
control system* (except SL 550) subsequently appear in the right multi-
The standard display ( page 143)
function display:
i In vehicles without engine oil measuring should appear in the multifunction dis-
system, the engine oil level is measured via the play. Engine Oil Level
oil dipstick ( page 286). OK
Press button k or j on the
When checking the oil level steering wheel until the following Add 1.0 qt
the vehicle must be parked on level message appears in the multifunction to reach max.
ground displays: oil level.

with the engine at operating tempera- (Canada: 1.0 liter)


ture, the vehicle must have been sta- Add 1.5 qts
tionary for at least 5 minutes with the to reach max.
engine turned off oil level.
with the engine not at operating tem- (Canada: 1.5 liters)
perature, the vehicle must have been After about 3 seconds, the following Add 2.0 qts
stationary for at least 30 minutes with message appears in the left multifunc- to reach max.
the engine turned off tion display: Engine Oil Measuring oil level.
Now.
(Canada: 2.0 liters)
i If you want to interrupt the checking
procedure, press the k or j button on
the multifunction steering wheel.

284
Operation
Engine compartment

If necessary, add engine oil. If you see the message: If there is excess engine oil with the engine
at normal operating temperature, the
For information on adding engine oil, see Observe
following message will appear:
( page 286). Waiting Time
Engine Oil Level
For more information on engine oil, see the If the engine is at operating tempera-
Reduce Oil Level
Technical data section ( page 457) and ture, wait 5 minutes before repeating
( page 460). the check procedure. Have excess oil siphoned or drained
off. Contact an authorized
If the engine is not at operating temper-
Other display messages Mercedes-Benz Center.
ature yet, wait 30 minutes before re-
If the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* peating the check procedure. ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
start/stop button is not in position 2, the It could cause damage to the engine and
If you see the message:
following message will appear: emission control system not covered by the
Engine Oil Level Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Turn ignition on
Not With For more information on messages in the
to measure
Engine Running display concerning engine oil, see the
engine oil level.
Turn off the engine. Practical hints section ( page 388).
Switch on the ignition ( page 40).
If the engine is at operating tempera-
ture, wait 5 minutes before checking
oil.
If the engine is at operating tempera-
ture yet, you must wait 30 minutes be-
fore checking oil.

285
Operation
Engine compartment

Checking engine oil level with the oil Open the hood ( page 282). Adding engine oil
dipstick (SL 550 only)
Pull out oil dipstick 1. ! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters
i In vehicles without an oil dipstick, the engine Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean. required for vehicles with Maintenance System.
oil level is measured via the control For a listing of approved engine oils and oil fil-
system ( page 284). Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the dip- ters, refer to the Factory Approved Service
stick guide tube. Products pamphlet (USA only) in your vehicle
When checking the oil level literature portfolio, or contact an authorized
Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after ap- Mercedes-Benz Center.
the vehicle must be parked on level
proximately 3 seconds to obtain accu- Using engine oils and oil filters of specification
ground
rate reading. other than those expressly required for the
the vehicle must have been stationary Maintenance System, or changing of oil and oil
The oil level is correct when it is be-
for at least 5 minutes with the engine filter at change intervals longer than those called
tween lower mark 3 (min.) and upper
turned off for by the Maintenance System will result in
mark 2 (max.) of the oil dipstick. engine or emission control system damage not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
i The filling quantity between the upper and Warranty.
lower marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
If necessary, add engine
oil ( page 286).
For more information on engine oil, see
Technical data section ( page 457) and
( page 460).
1 Oil dipstick For information on messages in the multi-
2 Upper mark function display concerning engine oil, see
3 Lower mark the Practical hints section ( page 388).

286
Operation
Engine compartment

Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck. Transmission fluid level


Add engine oil as required. Be careful
The transmission fluid level does not need
not to overfill with oil.
to be checked. If you notice transmission
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions,
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
entering the ground or water. check the automatic transmission.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. Oil level in the ABC system
It could cause damage to the engine and
emission control system not covered by the
Example illustration SL 550 Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. The oil level in the ABC system does not
need to be checked. If there is visible oil
1 Filler cap Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck. loss or if malfunction messages appear in
For more information on engine oil, see the the display, have an authorized
Technical data section ( page 457) and Mercedes-Benz Center check the ABC
( page 460). system.

Example illustration SL 55 AMG


1 Filler cap

287
Operation
Engine compartment

Coolant The coolant expansion tank is located on


Warning! G the passenger side of the engine compart-
The engine coolant is a mixture of water ment.
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. In order to avoid any potentially serious
burns:
When checking the coolant level,
Use extreme caution when opening the
the vehicle must be parked on level hood if there are any signs of steam or
ground coolant leaking from the cooling system,
the coolant temperature must be be- or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
low 158F (70C) cates that the coolant is overheated.
Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
above 158F (70C). Allow engine to
cool down before removing cap. The 1 Coolant expansion tank
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
is under pressure. Using a rag, slowly turn the cap approx-
Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- imately one half turn counterclockwise
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres- to release any excess pressure.
sure. If opened immediately, scalding Continue turning the cap counterclock-
hot fluid and steam will be blown out un- wise and remove it.
der pressure.
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
col which may burn if it comes into con-
tact with hot engine parts.

288
Operation
Engine compartment

The coolant level is correct if the level Windshield washer system and
for cold coolant:
headlamp cleaning system Warning! G
is up to the upper mark on the Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
The windshield washer reservoir is located
bracing rib of the coolant expansion ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
in the engine compartment.
tank (translucent) on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
for warm coolant: and burn. You could be seriously burned.
is approximately 0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher
Add coolant as required. Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards.
Replace and tighten cap. Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit
! SL 600 and SL 65 AMG: Only open the cap and water (or commercially available
on coolant expansion tank 1. Never open the
premixed windshield washer sol-
cap between the two charge-air coolers. Other-
wise, the engine could be damaged. vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
For more information, see Coolants 1 Cap for windshield washer reservoir
( page 463). Fluid for the windshield washer system ! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing
and the headlamp cleaning system is point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
supplied from the windshield washer the washer system/reservoir.
reservoir. It has a capacity of approxi-
mately 7.4 US qt. (7 l). ! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can dam-
During all seasons, add MB Windshield age the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
Washer Concentrate MB SummerFit to
water. Premix the windshield washer fluid For more information, see Windshield
in a suitable container. washer system and headlamp cleaning
system ( page 465).

289
Operation
Engine compartment

Battery
Warning! G Wear eye protection.
Your vehicle is equipped with two
Observe all safety instructions and precau- Rinse any acid spills imme-
batteries:
tions when handling automotive batteries. diately with clear water. Contact
The starter battery (located in the a physician if necessary.
engine compartment)
Risk of explosion.
The battery for electrical consumers Keep children away.
(located in the trunk)
These batteries should always be suffi- Fire, open flames and smoking
ciently charged in order to achieve their are prohibited when handling Follow the instructions in this
rated service life. Refer to Maintenance batteries. Avoid creating sparks. Operators Manual.
Booklet for battery maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for Batteries contain materials that can harm
Battery acid is caustic. Do not
short-distance trips, you will need to the environment if disposed of improperly.
allow it to come into contact
have the battery charge checked more Recycling of batteries is the preferred
with skin, eyes or clothing.
frequently. method of disposal. Many states require
Wear suitable protective cloth- sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
When replacing batteries, always use ing, especially gloves, apron and for recycling.
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. faceguard.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
for an extended period of time, consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.

290
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center Important guidelines
for information on tested and Warning! G
recommended rims and tires for summer Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. See an authorized Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous cause tire inflation pressure loss and
tion. If incorrectly sized rims and tires are damage cannot always be recognized on re- damage to the tire beads.
mounted: treads. The operating safety of the vehicle If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
The wheel brakes or suspension cannot be assured when such tires are used. inflation pressure and correct as
components can be damaged. required.
The operating clearance of the wheels Do not allow your tires to wear down
and the tires may no longer be correct. too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths of less than 1/8 in (3 mm).
When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).

291
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tire care and maintenance Tire inspection Life of tire


Every time you check your tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon
Warning! G pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
varying factors including but not limited to:
Driving style
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- excessive treadwear ( page 293)
Tire inflation pressure
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
cord or fabric showing through the
loss. As a result, you could lose control of Distance driven
tires rubber
your vehicle.

Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Warning! G
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them. Replace the tire if you find any of the above Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
conditions. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
at least once a month. For more informa- periodically for condition and inflation.
tion on checking tire inflation pressure, Spare tires will age and become worn over
see Recommended tire inflation pres- time even if never used, and thus should be
sure ( page 300). inspected and replaced when necessary.

292
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tread depth Storing tires


to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply re- with as little exposure to light as possible. Pro-
sharply reduced at tread depths of less duced. tect tires from contact with oil, grease and gaso-
than 1/8 in (3 mm). line.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Cleaning tires
law. These indicators are located in six widely.
places on the tread circumference and ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
become visible at a tread depth of approx- tires. The intense jet of water can result in
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the damage to the tire.
tire is considered worn and should be re- Always replace a damaged tire.
placed.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)

Warning! G 1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)


Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread.
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-
mend that you do not allow your tires

293
Operation
Tires and wheels

Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle carried by a single axle (front or rear).
Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
Unidirectional tires offer added advan- Two labels on your vehicle show how much either the front axle or rear axle.
tages, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry.
mance. To benefit, however, you must
1) The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction placard can be found on the drivers
specified.
door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of of people that can be in the vehicle and
the tire. the total weight that can be carried in
the vehicle. It also contains information
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the on the proper size and recommended
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi-
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg- tire inflation pressures for the original
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced. equipment tires on your vehicle. 1 Drivers door B-pillar
Always observe and follow applicable temporary 2) The certification label, also found on Following is a discussion on how to work
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated with the information contained on the
on the spare wheel.
the drivers door B-pillar tells you about
the gross weight capacity of your vehi- Tire and Loading Information placard with
cle, called the Gross Vehicle Weight regards to loading your vehicle.
Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the
weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
fuel and cargo. The certification label
also tells you about the front and rear
axle weight capacity, called the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR
is the total allowable weight that can be

294
Operation
Tires and wheels

Tire and Loading Information Tire and Loading Information placard Locate the statement The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
i Data shown on Tire and Loading Information
Warning! G placard example are for illustration purposes
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX
lbs. on the Tire and Loading
only. Load limit data are specific to each vehicle
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the and may vary from data shown in the illustration Information placard.
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire below. Refer to Tire and Loading Information The combined weight of all occupants,
placard on vehicle for actual data specific to your
and Loading Information placard on the cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
vehicle.
drivers door B-pillar. Overloading the tires (if applicable) should never exceed the
can overheat them, possibly causing a weight referenced in that statement.
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or Seating capacity
brake failure.
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants
that can be in the vehicle. The Tire and